You are on page 1of 319

Mai nt enanc e

Manual
Spi t f i r e 65/90
















Spitfire Maintenance Manual




3
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.
Tel.:81-(0)3-54867145
Fax.:81-(0)3-54867163
E-mail:ibd@mutoh.co.jp
http://www.mutoh.co.jp
MUTOH EUROPE N.V.
Tel.:32-(0)59-561400
Fax:32-(0)59-807117
E-mail:mutoh@mutoh.be
http://www.mutoh.be
MUTOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH.
Tel.:49-(0)2159 913430
Fax.:49-(0)2159 913456
E-mail:Mutoh-Sales@t-online.de
MUTOH AMERICA INC.
Tel.: (480) 968-7772
Fax: (480) 968-7990
E-mail:Sales@mutoh.com
http://www.mutoh.com

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




4
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




5
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

COPYRIGHT NOTICE


COPYRIGHT 2005 Mutoh Europe N.V. All rights reserved.


This document may not be reproduced by any means, in whole or in part, without written permission of the
copyright owner.

This document is furnished to support Mutohs Spitfire. In consideration of the furnishing of the information
contained in this document, the party to whom it is given, assumes its custody and control and agrees to the
following:

The information herein contained is given in confidence, and any part thereof shall not be copied or
reproduced without written consent of Mutoh Europe N.V.

This document or the contents herein under no circumstances shall be used in the manufacture or
reproduction of the article shown and the delivery of this document shall not constitute any right or license to
do so.


June 2005
Published: Mutoh Europe N.V., Archimedesstraat 13, B-8400 Oostende, BELGIUM


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




6
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




7
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Important Notice

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the product is operated in a commercial environment.

This product generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in
accordance with this manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
product in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his expense.

1. Radio interfere

Product generates weak radio signals and may interfere with television reception and utilities. If a
product does interfere with radio or TV reception, try following:

Change the direction of your radio and TV reception antenna or feeder.

Change the direction of the product.

Move either the product or the receiving antenna so there is more distance between them.

Be sure the product and the receiving antenna are on separate power lines.



2. Trademark mentioned in this manual.

MUTOH, Spitfire, Spitfire Mild Solvent, MH-GL, MH-GL2, MH-RTL are registered trademarks or
product names of MUTOH INDUSTRIES LTD.

Centronics and Bitronics are registered trademarks or product names of Centronics Data Computer
Corporation.

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows XP, Windows NT4.0, Windows2000, and
MSDOS are registered trademarks or product names of Microsoft Corporation.

DOS/V is registered trademark and product name of International Business Machine Corporation
(IBM).

Other company and product names may be registered trademarks or product names.



No part of this product or publication may be reproduced, copied or transmitted in any form or by any means,
except for personal use, without the permission of MUTOH EUROPE N.V.

The product and the contents of this publication may be changed without prior notification.

MUTOH EUROPE N.V. has made the best efforts to keep this publication free from error, but if you find any
uncertainties or misprints, please call us or the shop where you bought this equipment.

MUTOH EUROPE N.V. shall not be liable for any damages or troubles resulting from the use of this
equipment or this manual.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




8
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




9
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Safety Instructions.......................................................................................................15
1.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................15
1.2. Warnings, Cautions and Notes................................................................................15
1.3. Important safety instructions ...................................................................................15
1.4. Warning labels ........................................................................................................18
1.5 Labels in function of transportation ..........................................................................21
2. Product Overview........................................................................................................23
2.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................23
2.2. Features..................................................................................................................23
2.3. Part names and functions........................................................................................24
2.3.1. Front .................................................................................................................24
2.3.2. Back..................................................................................................................26
2.3.3. Position and function of the heating elements ..................................................27
2.3.4. Operation panel ................................................................................................28
2.4. Printer status ...........................................................................................................30
2.4.1. Normal ..............................................................................................................30
2.4.2. Setting menu display ........................................................................................30
2.4.3. Changing the printer status...............................................................................31
3. specifications...............................................................................................................33
3.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................33
3.2. Product Specifications.............................................................................................34
3.3. Interface Specifications ...........................................................................................35
3.4. Installation...............................................................................................................37
3.4.1. Choosing a place for the printer........................................................................37
3.4.2. Installing the printer ..........................................................................................39
4. Parts Replacement ......................................................................................................41
4.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................41
4.2. Removing the cover ................................................................................................42
4.2.1. Removing the I/H cover ....................................................................................43
4.2.2. Removing side cover R.....................................................................................44
4.2.3. Removing side cover L .....................................................................................46
4.2.4. Removing the front cover..................................................................................48
4.2.5. Removing the panel unit assembly...................................................................52
4.2.6. Removing the Y rail cover.................................................................................53
4.2.7. Removing front paper guide..............................................................................54
4.2.8. Removing rear paper guide ..............................................................................56
4.2.9. Removing the head cover .................................................................................57
4.2.10. Removing the maintenance cover ..................................................................58
4.3. Replacement of the heater element ........................................................................59
4.3.1. Heater elements ...............................................................................................59
4.4. Replacing Board Bases...........................................................................................66
4.4.1 Replacing the Mainboard assembly, HDD_Extension board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board assembly, PCI_Linux board assembly and cooling fan assembly 66
4.4.2. Replacing the power source board assembly ...................................................72
4.4.3. Replacing the inlet assembly, inlet board assembly and lever foot SW cable
assembly ....................................................................................................................74
4.4.4. Replacing the JUNCTION board assembly ......................................................75
4.5. Replacing the PF Actuator ......................................................................................76
4.5.1. Replacing the PF motor assembly....................................................................76
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




10
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.2. Replacing the PF_ENC assembly and PF scale assembly...............................77
4.5.3. Replacing the PF deceleration pulley assembly ...............................................78
4.5.4. Replacing the PF deceleration belt ...................................................................79
4.5.5. Replacing the P_REAR_R sensor assembly and P_REAR_L sensor assembly
...................................................................................................................................80
4.5.6. Replacing the suction fan assembly .................................................................81
4.5.7. Replacing the lever motor assembly and the arm motor installation board.......82
4.5.8. Replacing the transmission photosensor ..........................................................84
4.5.9. Replacing the flushing box assembly................................................................86
4.6. Replacing the CR Actuator......................................................................................92
4.6.1. Replacing the CR motor assembly ...................................................................92
4.6.2. Replacing the steel belt ....................................................................................93
4.6.3. Replacing the SLIDE motor assembly, HD_SLIDE sensor assembly, and slide
motor installation board ..............................................................................................95
4.6.4. Replacing the T fence (Timing fence or Linear Y-Axis Encoder) ......................96
4.6.5. Replacing the CR slave pulley assembly..........................................................98
4.6.6. Replacing the CR actuator pulley and the CR deceleration belt .......................99
4.6.7. Replacing the steel bearer, tube guide, CR tape power cable and ink tube ...100
4.6.8. Replace the cover R sensor assembly and the cover L sensor assembly......102
4.7. Replacing the Cursor.............................................................................................103
4.7.1. Replacing the cutter holder, cutter spring, cutter cap, solenoid assembly and
solenoid spring .........................................................................................................103
4.7.2. Replacing the print head assembly and head tape power cable.....................105
4.7.3. Replacing the H ink tube, tube branch and damper assembly........................107
4.7.4. Replacing the CR board assembly .................................................................108
4.7.5. Replacing the CR_ENC assembly..................................................................110
4.7.6. Replacing the P_EDGE sensor assembly ......................................................111
4.7.7. Replacing the CR cursor assembly.................................................................112
4.7.8. Replacing the cursor roller assembly..............................................................113
4.8. Replacing the MAINTENANCE station Area .........................................................115
4.8.1. Replacing the Capping Station Assembly (Maintenance Assembly)...............115
4.8.1. Assembling the Capping Station.....................................................................118
4.8.3. Replacing the caps .........................................................................................121
4.8.4. Replacing the wiper and wiperarm and replace the sponge ...........................122
4.8.5. Replacing the SLIDE motor assembly (wiper arm) .........................................127
4.8.6. Replacing the transmission photosensor (wiper home position and maintenance
home position) ..........................................................................................................128
4.9. Replacing the Pump Area .....................................................................................129
4.9.1. Replacing the pump assembly........................................................................129
4.9.2. Replacing the pump........................................................................................131
4.9.3. Replacing the pump motor assembly..............................................................132
4.10. Replacing the Cartridge Area..............................................................................133
4.10.1. Replacing the I/H (ink holder) assembly .......................................................133
4.11. Replacing Supports and Scroller .........................................................................137
4.11.1. Replacing the waste fluid bottle assembly ....................................................137
4.11.2. Replacing the waste bottle box sensor assembly .........................................138
5. Self-Diagnosis Function............................................................................................141
5.1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................141
5.2. Preparation............................................................................................................141
5.2.1. Preparations on Machine................................................................................141
5.2.2. Starting Up......................................................................................................142
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




11
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.3. Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode.......................................................................143
5.3.1. Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode......................................................................143
5.3.2. Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu ........................................................145
5.4. Test / Inspection Menu..........................................................................................146
5.4.1. RAM Capacity Menu.......................................................................................147
5.4.2. Version Menu..................................................................................................147
5.4.3. Operation Panel Menu....................................................................................148
5.4.4. Sensor Menu ..................................................................................................149
5.4.5. Encoder Menu ................................................................................................150
5.4.6. Fan Menu .......................................................................................................151
5.4.7. History Menu...................................................................................................151
5.4.8. Head Signal Menu ..........................................................................................153
5.5. Adjustment Menu ..................................................................................................154
5.5.1. Skew Check Menu..........................................................................................155
5.5.2. Head rank input menu ....................................................................................156
5.5.3 Head Nozzle Check Menu..............................................................................157
5.5.4. Head Slant Check Menu.................................................................................159
5.5.5. Repeatability Adjustment (Bi-Directional) .......................................................164
5.5.6. CW adjustments (Uni-Directional)...................................................................165
5.5.7. Band Feed Correction Menu (X Length) .........................................................166
5.5.8. Top & bottom adjustment menu......................................................................168
5.5.9. P_REAR sensor position adjustment menu....................................................169
5.5.10. Test print menu.............................................................................................170
5.5.11. Head wash menu..........................................................................................171
5.5.12. Software Counter Initialization Menu ............................................................173
5.5.13. Feed Pitch Check Menu ...............................................................................174
5.5.14. Fill printing menu ..........................................................................................174
5.6. Purge Menu...........................................................................................................175
5.7. Sample Printing Menu...........................................................................................176
5.8. Parameter Menu....................................................................................................177
5.8.1. Parameter Initialization Menu .........................................................................177
5.8.2. Parameter Update Menu ................................................................................178
5.9. Endurance Running Menu.....................................................................................187
5.9.1. CR Motor Endurance Menu............................................................................188
5.9.2. PF Motor Endurance Menu.............................................................................189
5.9.3. Cutter Endurance menu..................................................................................190
5.9.4. Head Up/Down Endurance Menu ...................................................................191
5.9.5. Head Lock Endurance menu ..........................................................................192
5.9.6. Pump Endurance menu..................................................................................193
5.9.7. Lever Motor Endurance Menu ........................................................................194
5.9.8. Sequential Printing Endurance Menu .............................................................195
5.9.9. General Endurance Menu...............................................................................196
5.9.10. Endurance Running Check Menu.................................................................197
5.10. Head Lock Menu .................................................................................................198
5.11. Heater System menu...........................................................................................199
5.11.1. Heater Status Menu......................................................................................199
5.11.2. Heater Temperature Menu ...........................................................................199
5.11.3. Heater Test 30 Menu....................................................................................200
5.11.4. Heater Test 50 Menu....................................................................................200
5.11.5. Heater Test Max Menu .................................................................................200
5.11.6. Test Aging Menu...........................................................................................201
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




12
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.11.7. Heater Version Menu....................................................................................201
5.12. Sol Prepare menu ...............................................................................................202
5.13. SMS MEnu..........................................................................................................202
5.13. Machine size select menu...................................................................................203
6. Maintenance Mode.....................................................................................................205
6.1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................205
6.2. Operating Maintenance Mode...............................................................................205
6.2.1. Starting Up Maintenance Mode ......................................................................205
6.2.2. Operating Maintenance Mode.........................................................................205
6.3. Maintenance Menu................................................................................................206
6.3.1. Counter Display Menu ....................................................................................206
6.3.2. Counter Initialization Menu .............................................................................208
6.3.3. MAC address write enable menu....................................................................209
6.3.4 Head Voltage...................................................................................................210
7. Adjustments...............................................................................................................211
7.1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................211
7.2. Adjustment ............................................................................................................211
7.3. Parameter backup.................................................................................................214
7.3.1. Tools required for work ...................................................................................214
7.3.2. Procedure for creating backup parameters.....................................................215
7.3.3. Backup parameter installation procedure .......................................................216
7.4. Firmware installation .............................................................................................217
7.4.1. Tools required for work ...................................................................................217
7.4.2. Installation procedure .....................................................................................217
7.5. Steel belt tension adjustment ................................................................................220
7.5.1. Tools required for work ...................................................................................220
7.5.2. Adjustment Procedure ....................................................................................220
7.6. PF deceleration belt tension adjustment ...............................................................222
7.6.1. Tools required for work ...................................................................................222
7.6.2. Adjustment Procedure ....................................................................................222
7.7. Head precision adjustment (slant) .........................................................................223
7.7.1 Head slant adjustment .....................................................................................223
7.7.2. Front and back of head adjustment ................................................................225
7.8. Repeatability Adjustment (Bi-Directional) ..............................................................228
7.9. CW adjustments (Uni-Directional) .........................................................................229
7.10. CR deceleration belt tension adjustment .............................................................230
7.10.1. Tools required for work .................................................................................230
7.10.2. Adjustment Procedure ..................................................................................230
7.11. Cover sensor adjustment ....................................................................................231
7.12. Head height adjustment ......................................................................................232
7.12.1. Tools required for work .................................................................................232
7.12.2. Adjustment Procedure ..................................................................................232
7.13. Media sensor sensitivity adjustment....................................................................234
7.13.1. Tools required for work .................................................................................234
7.13.2. Adjustment Procedure ..................................................................................234
7.14. Cutter adjustment ................................................................................................238
7.15. Pump tubing layout for pump assembly ..............................................................240
7.15.1 Pump tubing layout ........................................................................................240
7.16. Board checklist ....................................................................................................242
7.16.1. Power supply board. .....................................................................................242
7.16.2. Control board. ...............................................................................................243
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




13
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.16.3. Power board. ................................................................................................244
7.16.4. Heater Elements...........................................................................................244
7.16.5. Checklist .......................................................................................................246
7.17 Flushing box height position adjustment ..............................................................247
8. Maintenance...............................................................................................................251
8.1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................251
8.2. Cleaning................................................................................................................252
8.3. Periodical Services................................................................................................253
8.3.1. Service by end-user........................................................................................253
8.3.2. Service by authorised Mutoh technician .........................................................255
8.4. Part Life Information..............................................................................................258
8.5. Jig and Tool List ....................................................................................................259
8.5.1. Required Tools ...............................................................................................259
8.6. Lubrication/Bonding...............................................................................................260
8.7. Transportation of Machine.....................................................................................262
9. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................265
9.1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................265
9.2. Troubleshooting procedures when a message has been displayed......................265
9.2.1. Operating condition display ............................................................................266
9.2.2. Message type errors.......................................................................................268
9.2.3. Heating system error ......................................................................................275
9.2.4. Data error .......................................................................................................276
9.2.5. Command errors.............................................................................................277
9.2.6. Errors requiring restart ....................................................................................278
9.3. Troubleshooting procedures when errors are not displayed..................................289
9.3.1. Problems relating to initial operation...............................................................289
9.3.2. Problems relating to paper feed......................................................................295
9.3.3. Problems relating to the printing operation .....................................................296
9.3.4. Problems relating to noise ..............................................................................308
9.3.5. Problems relating to the paper cutting operation ............................................310
9.3.6. Problems relating to online and functions .......................................................313
9.3.7. Other problems...............................................................................................315
10. Appendix...................................................................................................................317
10.1. Introduction .........................................................................................................317
10.2 Wiring Diagram.....................................................................................................317
10.4. Service Parts List/Exploded Views/Configuration Diagrams................................317

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




14
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




15
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains the meaning of safety terms for personnel who operate this equipment, important
safety instructions, and the positions of the warning labels.


Important :

Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual when using the
equipment.


1.2. WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES
Safety terms in this manual and the contents of warning labels attached to the printer are categorized into
the following three types depending on the degree of risk (or the scale of accident).
Read the following explanations carefully and follow the instructions in this manual.

Safety terms Details
Important Must be followed carefully to avoid death or serious bodily injury
Caution Must be observed to avoid bodily injury (moderately or lightly) or damage to your
equipment
Notes Contains important information and useful tips on the operation of your printer

1.3. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
General safety instructions that must be observed to use the equipment safely are explained below.

Do not place the printer in the following areas. Doing so may result in the printer tipping or falling
over and causing injury.
Unstable surfaces
Angled place
Areas subject to vibration by other equipment

Do not stand on or place heavy objects on your printer. Doing so may result in the printer tipping
or falling over and causing injury.

Do not cover the ventilation hole of your printer with cloth, such as a blanket or table cloth. Doing
so could obstruct ventilation and cause fire.

Do not place the printer in humid and dusty areas. Doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.

Do not use a damaged power cable. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

Do not attempt to plug in electrical plugs with wet hands. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




16
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Do not connect earth cables in the following areas.
Gas pipes Doing so may cause fire or an explosion.
Earth terminals for telephone line or lightening rod Doing so may cause a large flow of
voltage if lightening occurs.
Water pipes or faucets If there is a plastic part in the pipe, the earth will not work
properly.

Do not insert or drop metal or inflammable objects into openings, such as ventilation outlets.
Doing so may result in electrical shock and fire.

Stop using your printer if a liquid is spilled into it. This may cause electrical shock or fire. Turn the
printer off as soon as possible, unplug the power cord, and contact your local MUTOH dealer.

Be sure to use the attached cable. Otherwise, electrical shock or fire may occur.

Be sure to use the specified voltage (AC 100 V to 120V, or AC 220V to 240V). Otherwise,
electrical shock or fire may occur.

Use electricity directly from a power outlet (AC 100 V to 120V, or AC 220V to 240V). Do not put
many loads on one electrical output. Otherwise, heat may be generated and cause fire.

Be sure to use an outlet with an earth terminal and use the terminal correctly. Otherwise,
electrical shock or fire may occur.

Follow the instructions below when handling the power cable.
o Do not modify the cable.
o Do not put heavy objects on the cable.
o Do not bend, twist or pull the cable.
o Do not wire the cable near equipment that generates heat.

Follow the instructions below when handling the power plug. Otherwise, fire may occur.
o Wipe away dust and any other residue before inserting the plug.
o Ensure that the plug is firmly inserted as far as it will go.

When handling the foot switch, be aware of the following:
o Do not place anything heavy on the foot switch.
o Do not bend the cable of the foot switch with force and do not pull.
o Do not place the foot switch near thermal devices.

When handling ink cassettes, be careful that ink does not get in your eyes or on your skin.
However, if this happens, flush immediately with water and wash skin with soap. Otherwise, your
eyes may become congested or inflamed slightly. If you feel discomfort, consult a doctor
immediately.

Do not disassemble ink cassettes. Otherwise, ink may get in your eyes or on your skin.

Be careful not to pinch your fingers when opening and closing the cover of the ink compartment.

Be careful not to pinch your fingers when opening and closing the front cover.

Follow the instructions below when connecting the network interface cable. Otherwise, electrical
shock or fire may occur.
o Do not touch the connector.
o Do not connect the network cable connector that is not the same specification to the
interface board.

When cutting the roll media, be careful of the following. Incorrect handling can result in injury to
the hands and fingers from the razor blade.
o When holding the media, do not place fingers over the media cut groove.
o Move the razor blade slowly along the media cutting groove.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




17
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Do not use thinner, benzene, alcohol or other active agents. Doing so may result in damage or
paint peeling from the casing.

Be careful not to spill water inside the printer. Doing so may result in a short circuit.

Be careful not to touch the heaters during or after operation. Doing so may result in burns.

Only use Spitfire Mild Solvent Ink and appropriate cleaning liquid.

Never open the covers fixed with screws, except the left cover. Doing so may result in electrical
shock or a malfunctioning in the printer.

Do not touch the cutter blade. Doing so may result in bodily injury.

Do not cut hard objects or drop the cutter. Doing so may damage or chip the cutter blade.

Do not bend or pull the waste fluid tube. Doing so may cause that the waste fluid will leak out and
malfunction in the product.

Do not touch the cleaning wiper or the head cap unit whit bear hands. Use a dust free cloth and
gloves to clean.

Do not tilt the printer, stand it against a wall or turn it upside down. Doing so may cause ink to
leak inside the printer. Movement after transport is also not covered by the warranty.

When installing options, do not touch the elements on the circuit board. The elements on the
boards can be very hot and can cause burns.

Have four or more people unpack and assemble the printer.

When lifting the printer out of the packing box, be sure to remove the vinyl cover first, and then
grab the holding grips on the sides of the printer. Lifting the printer with the vinyl cover on may
cause your hands to slip and drop or damage the printer.

Have two or more people transport the printer.

Ensure that the plug has been disconnected from the power socket when it is not to be used for a
long time.

Earth wires must be connected to wires or terminals that fulfill the conditions below.
o Earth terminals of power sockets
o Earth wires with copper morsel that is at least 650 mm under the ground

Earth wires must be connected to wires or terminals that fulfill the conditions below.

Keep the printer horizontal during transportation.

Be sure to do the following before attaching options.
o Turn the printer off.
o Unplug the power cord from the socket.
o Unplug cables connected to the printer. Otherwise, damage to the printer or your computer
may occur.
o Remove electrostatic charge from your clothes and body by touching the metal parts of the
printer.
o Electronic components such as the memory may malfunction if exposed to an electrostatic
charge.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




18
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

1.4. WARNING LABELS

The handling, attachment locations, and types of warning labels are explained below.
Warning labels are attached on areas which require attention. Read and understand the positions and
contents thoroughly before performing your work.

1.4.1. Handling the warning labels

Be sure to note the following when handling the labels.


Notes :

Make sure that all labels can be recognized. If text or illustrations cannot be seen
clearly, either clean or replace the label.
When cleaning labels, use a cloth with water or neutral detergent. Do not use a
solvent or gasoline.
If a warning label is damaged, lost or cannot be recognized, replace the label.
When replacing warning labels, contact your local MUTOH dealer.


1.4.2. Locations and types of warning labels

The locations of warning labels are shown below.

1.4.2.1. Location and types of warning labels on front part.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




19
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

No. Type

1




2

3



4,7




5,6



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




20
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



8




1.4.2.2. Location and types of warning labels on back part.




No. Type

3
CAUTION
THIS UNIT HAS TWO POWER SUPPLY CORDS, WHEN WiNDING
UNIT IS PROVIDED. TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK, DISCONNECT ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS
BEFORE SERVICING.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




21
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

1.5 LABELS IN FUNCTION OF TRANSPORTATION




Nr. Description
1 BEFORE powering on printer,
REMOVE clamp from waste tubes:
On right bottom side of machine!
Remove dummy cassettes before powering on the printer.
2 BEFORE powering on printer;
REMOVE clamps from waste tubes
3 You can also find a label on each of the 8 dummy cassettes:
Dummy cassette, please remove before powering on the printer.
4 BEFORE powering on printer,
REMOVE dummy cassettes.
5 Plastic bag with the 8 waste tubes and clamps

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




22
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




23
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

2. PRODUCT OVERVIEW
2.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains the features, part names, and functions of the printer.

2.2. FEATURES
The features of the printer are explained below.

(1) High speed output

2 models feature new print heads and achieve high speed printing.
They also offer printing widths up to 1643mm in Spitfire-65 (65 inch) and 2250 mm in Spitfire-90 (90 inch).

Machine Media Width Printing Width
Spitfire 65 1653 mm 1643 mm
Spitfire 90 2280 mm 2250 mm

(2) Wide variety of compatible media

Adjustable head height can be adapted to various media thickness from 0.08 up to 1.1 mm.

(3) Vibrant Colour Reproduction

To reproduce sharp and vivid colour, 4 ink colours are used for printing. 220ml of large capacity Spitfire Mild
Solvent cassette is equipped with an IC chip, which can automatically detect the ink quantity, significantly
improving productivity.

(4) Effective usage of media

A JOG feature is provided allowing the user to set the printing position. Because printing can be performed
on media on which there has already been printed, excess space can be used effectively.

(5) RIP

Software Starter Pack included in-the-box. (To be defined with the order.)


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




24
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

2.3. PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Part names and functions are explained below.

2.3.1. Front

No. Name Function


1 Operation panel This panel is used to set operational conditions, the status of the printer and
other functions.


2 Ink compartment This is the place for installing ink cassettes.


3 Front cover This cover keeps the operator safe from the drive parts of the printer while it is
operating. Only open and/or close the cover to perform following operations:
Media setting and replacement
Cutter blade replacement
Cleaning the cleaning wiper
In case of media jam.


4 Pressure rollers This roller is used to press the media from above and keep it flat when printing.


5 Maintenance cover This protects users from electric shocks caused by touching the internal
electrical parts. The cover is opened when expansion memory (optional) has to
be installed, and is closed for normal use.


6 Stand This stand is used to install the printer on a surface flat floor.
The unit is delivered with a Unwinder / Winder 100 system

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




25
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



7
10
Paper Guide Support the media during printing
It houses the fixer, post-fixer and dryer.


8 Carriage This is a cover to protect the user from the internal components of the unit. This
is opened during following operation :
When cleaning the cleaning wiper.


9 Foot switch This switch is used to control the Unwinder / Winder


11 Daily Maintenance
Cover
Two covers which can be opened easily for daily maintenance.


12 Front winding
system (winder 100)
Motorized roll-up system.


13 Swingbars Adjust the tension of the media.


14 Rear winding
system (unwinder
100)
Motorized roll-off system.


15 Waste bottle To collect the waste fluid.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




26
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

2.3.2. Back



No. Name Function
1 AC inlet This is the inlet interface to which the power plug is connected.
2 Interface connector This is the connector to which the interface cable is connected.
3 Foot switch connector This is the connector to which the foot switch cable is attached.
4 Insertion slot This is the slot for inserting media when loading it.
5 Interface slot The network interface board attaches here.
6 Hard disk slot The hard disk attaches here. When not using a hard disk, keep the
cover closed.
7 Nameplate rating The type, name, serial number, rating and other details of the printer are
labelled here.
8 Rear Heater Supports the media during printing and houses the pre-heaters.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




27
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

2.3.3. Position and function of the heating elements



Heater element Temperature Function
Pre-heater (Heater A) 20 50C Open the pores to make the media more receptive
for Spitfire Mild Solvent Ink.

Fixer (Heater B) 20 40C To establish optimum fixation onto the media
(coated and uncoated).
Optimizes the dot gain control.

Post-Fixer (Heater C) 20 70C The post-fixer finalizes the fixation process and
helps to make the prints touch-dry.

Dryer (Heater D) 20 50C The dryer completes the drying for compatibility
with the take-up in combination with higher output
speeds.
Stickiness of printed banner materials is improved.


There have been a number of requests from the field, asking the heaters to be on by default for a few user
settings. This has now been implemented as follows:

1) For user 1 and user 8 default settings are as follows:
a. Pre heater A: 50C
b. Fixer B: 40C
c. Post Fixer C: 50C
d. Dryer D: 50C
2) For users 2 7, by default the heaters are still OFF.


Notes :

Please note some RIP software do not allow selection of the user from software
side. In some cases, however, they do automatically activate user 8.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




28
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

2.3.4. Operation panel

The operation panel is used to set operational conditions, display the status of the printer, and set other
functions.

The names and functions of the operation keys and status lamps are explained below.



(1) Operation keys

No. Name Normal Setup menu display
1 [POWER] key Turns the printer on and off. Turns the printer on and off.
2 [F1] key Executes the function assigned to F1. Executes the function assigned to F1.
3 [F2] key Executes the function assigned to F2. Executes the function assigned to F2.
4 [F3] key Executes the function assigned to F3. Executes the function assigned to F3.
5 [F4] key Executes the function assigned to F4. Executes the function assigned to F4.
6 [MENU ] key Changes the LCD monitor display to
the setup menu status.
Changes the menu in reverse order.
7 [MENU ] key Changes the LCD monitor display to
setup menu status.
Changes the menu in forward order.
8 [ENTER] key Displays the print mode currently set. Determines the new parameter value and
changes the LCD monitor display to the
next menu. Sets the parameter value and
changes the LCD monitor display to the
next menu.
9 [CANCEL] key - Cancels the new parameter value and
changes the LCD monitor display to the
next menu. Clears the parameter value
and changes the LCD monitor display to
the next menu.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




29
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


(1) LCD monitor and light indicators.

No. Name Colour Status Function
10 LCD monitor - - The monitor displays the operation status and error
messages of the printer.
ON The printer is on. 11 POWER lamp Green
OFF The printer is off.
Flashing An error has occurred. The contents will be displayed on
the LCD monitor.
12 ERROR lamp Red
OFF Either there is no error or the power is off.
ON The printer is receiving print data.
Flashing The printer is analysing received data.
13 DATA lamp Orange
OFF The printer is waiting to receive print data.
ON The pressure roller is in the release position.
Media has not been loaded.
14 MEDIA SET lamp Orange
OFF The pressure roller is in the secured position.
The media has not been loaded.
ON The media type is set to roll media. 15 ROLL lamp Orange
OFF The media type is set to sheet media.
ON The media type is set to sheet media. 16 SHEET lamp Orange
OFF The media type is set to roll media.
ON The temperature of the heating elements is the requested
temperature.
The real temperature is the same as the requested
temperature.
Flashing The heating elements are warming up.
The real temperature is different as the requested
temperature.
17 HEATER lamp Orange
OFF The heating elements are powered OFF.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




30
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

2.4. PRINTER STATUS
The status of the printer is explained below.

2.4.1. Normal

Indicates that the printer can draw print data when media is loaded.
You can also make settings concerning printing using the operation panel.
The contents displayed on the LCD monitor of the operation panel is as follows.

1 Ready to print
2 Heaters Cleaning 3
4 Cut&Feed Lever Up 5
6 User 1 xxxm 7

No. Position Description
1 1st line Displays the current status of the printer. Depending on the status, the
contents may be displayed in 2 to 4 lines.
2 Left of 2nd line Displays the function assigned to [F1] key.
3 Right of 2nd line Displays the function assigned to [F2] key.
4 Left of 3rd line Displays the function assigned to [F3] key.
5 Right of 3rd line Displays the function assigned to [F4] key.
6 Left of 4th line Displays the currently set media type.
7 Right of 4th line Displays the approximate amount of remaining media that is currently
set. (Units: m)
However, the amount is displayed only when either "Roll media 1",
"Roll media 2", or "Roll media 3" is selected in the Roll media setting
menu.

2.4.2. Setting menu display

Indicates that you can make settings concerning printing using the operation panel.
Operation regarding printing is possible via the operation panel.
The contents displayed on the LCD monitor of the operation panel is as follows.

1 * SetupMenu *
2 InkStatus OriginSet 3
4 TestPrint MediaSet 5
(1/7) 6

No. Position Description
1 1st line Displays the setting menu name currently set.
2 Left of 2nd line Displays the function assigned to [F1] key.
3 Right of 2nd line Displays the function assigned to [F2] key.
4 Left of 3rd line Displays the function assigned to [F3] key.
5 Right of 3rd line Displays the function assigned to [F4] key.
6 4th line Displays the currently available functions of the [F1] key to the [F4]
key.
Displays the page status if there are multiple pages for the currently
displayed setting menu.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




31
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

2.4.3. Changing the printer status

To change the printer status, follow the steps below.

(1) Changing the status from normal to the setting menu display

Press either [MENU ] or [MENU ] on the operation panel when the printer is in normal status.
The display of the operation panel changes to the Setting menu display.


Notes :

Refer to "Setup menu" for details of the setting menu.


(2) Changing the status from the setting menu display to normal

Take one of the following actions when the printer is in the setting menu display to change the operation
panel display to normal one.

Press the [CANCEL] key on the operation panel.
Leave the printer as it is for 3 minutes when the status is in the setting menu display.

Ready to print
Heaters Cleaning
Cut&Feed Lever Up
User 1 xxxm

[MENU ] or [MENU ]



[CANCEL] or leave the printer as it is
for 3 minutes

* SetupMenu *
InkStatus OriginSet
TestPrint MediaSet
(1/7)


Notes :

Refer to Status messages" for details of displaying the printer status.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




32
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




33
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


3. SPECIFICATIONS
3.1. INTRODUCTION
This section explains the specifications and installation procedures for optional parts.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




34
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

3.2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Printers 65- model 90- model
Technology Drop-on-demand Micro Piezo Inkjet Technology.
Variable drop mass output between 5.4 ng and 41.5 ng
Media Thickness Compensation Automatic media thickness compensation.
Variable RIP controlled Head Height
Maximum Media Widths 1653 mm 2280 mm
Maximum Print Widths 1643 mm 2250 mm
Media Thickness
Diameter / Core
Weight
Range: 0.08 mm 1.1 mm
Maximum: 150 mm / 2 or 3
Maximum: 50 kg
Colour Channels 8 colour channels 4 process colour output
Inks
Spitfire Mild Solvent 2xCMYK speed set-up
Spitfire Mild Solvent CMYKLcLm photo tone rendering set-up
Ink Cassette Capacity / Type 220 ml / smart chip ink type & order sensing
Print Modes & Panel Control Options Uni & Bi-directional output, Interweaving, Mirror Output, Multi
Copy, Ink Status, Origin Control
LCD Display Backlight LED 4 lines x 20 characters
Take-up System (standard) Automated
Roll Media Core 2 & 3
Interface Centronics, IEEE 1284 compatible / Network, High Speed
Interface (standard high-speed interface card 4 Mb/s).
Graphics Command Language RTL-PASS, MH-GL, MH-GL/2
Power Consumption 1300 VA
80 VA in stand-by mode
1400 VA
100 VA in stand-by mode
External Dimensions in mm (W x D x H)

Weight
3100 x 750 x 1250

195 kg
3700 x 750 x 1250

215 kg
Power Supply AC 100 120 V / AC 220 240 V auto-switching
Working Environment Temperature: 18 27 C Recommended : 23C
Humidity: 40 65 % (no condensation) Recommended : 55%
Noise Level Operating: 54 dB or less
Standard VCCI (Class A), FCC (Class A), UL, CE, CCIB
Standard Items Hard Disk: 20.3 GB Stores 16 jobs Up to 99 copies/job
PostScript RIP included
Optional Item Air Purification System

Specifications are liable to changes without prior notice. All trademarks mentioned are property of their
respective owners.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




35
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

3.3. INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
This section explains the specifications for the interfaces supported by this product.

3.3.1 Centronics Bidirection Parallel Interface:IEEE1284 Specifications

(1) Interface Specifications

Item Specifications
Transmission modes Compatible , Nibble , ECP Mode
Data length 8 bits
Transmission direction Unidirectional (receiving only), Bidirectional
Connector pin number


(2) Table of parallel interface pin numbers and signals

Pin
number
Connection
signal
Signal direction Pin
number
Connection signal Signal
direction
1 STROBE To printer 19 SG
2 DATA1 To and from printer 20 SG
3 DATA2 To and from printer 21 SG
4 DATA3 To and from printer 22 SG
5 DATA4 To and from printer 23 SG
6 DATA5 To and from printer 24 SG
7 DATA6 To and from printer 25 SG
8 DATA7 To and from printer 26 SG
9 DATA8 To and from printer 27 SG
10 ACK From printer 28 SG
11 BUSY From printer 29 SG
12 P ERROR From printer 30 SG
13 SELECTED From printer 31 INIT To printer
14 AUTOFD To printer 32 FAULT From printer
15 Not connected 33 Not connected
16 SG 34 Not connected
17 FG 35 Not connected
18 +5V 36 SELECTIN To printer

(3) Recommended Centronics cable specifications

Item Specifications
Interface Dual-direction Parallel Interface:IEEE1284
Structure AWG2818 (twisted pair wiring)
Shield construction Metallic tape + weaving (double shielded cable)
Characteristic impedance 62

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




36
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

3.3.2. Network Interface Specifications

Item Specifications
NetWork Type Ethernet IEEE802.3
NetWork I/F 10 Base-T,100 Base-TX(automatic switching)
(RJ-45 connector, twisted pair cable, ycategory 5)
Protocol TCP/IP
Mode ftp
lpr
socket
Functions Automatic protocol recognition
Transmission speed up to 4 MB/s
Network environment setting by Web.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




37
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


3.4. INSTALLATION
Product installation is explained below.

3.4.1. Choosing a place for the printer

Install the unit on a proper location referring to the following.


Important :

Do not place the printer on a location under the following conditions. Doing so
may cause the product to fall, become damaged, or cause injury.
o Unstable surfaces
o Slanted surfaces
o Locations that are subject to vibration from other product
Do not stand on the printer or place any heavy objects on it. Doing so may
cause it to fall over, become damaged, or cause injury.
Do not cover the ventilation hole of the printer with cloth, such as a blanket or
table cloth. Doing so could prevent the printer from ventilating and cause fire.
Keep the printer away from humid and dusty areas. Humidity may result in
electrical shock or fire.


3.4.1.1. Installation environment Requirements

Choose a place for printer installation following the requirements in the table below.

65 model 12.7m (144ft) or larger. Frontage of 4.7m (15.7ft) or greater. Area
90 model 14.3m (162ft) or larger. Frontage of 5.3m (17.7ft) or greater.

Floor loading capability 2490Pa (300kg/m) or over

65 90
Voltage AC 100-120V
AC 220-240V
AC 100-120V
AC 220-240V
Frequency 60/50Hz1Hz 60/50Hz1Hz
Electrical
Capacity AC100V-120V : 12A
AC220V-240V : 6A
AC100V-120V : 13A
AC220V-240V : 7A

In order to protect the printer for over currents, short circuits and earth faults, the building
installation should be equipped with an automatic breaker double pole of 20 A and an earth leakage
switch of 300 mA.

Recommended
working
environment
Temperature: 23C
Humidity: 55%, without condensation
Operational
conditions
Temperature: 18C-27C
Humidity: 40% to 65%, without condensation
Rate of change Temperature: No more than 2C per hour
Humidity: No more than 5% per hour
Environmental
Storage
environment
Temperature: 4C to 50C
Humidity: 40% to 80%, without condensation (When ink has been
discharged.)
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




38
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Notes :

Avoid the following temperature and humidity conditions. Otherwise, printed
images may appear differently from what you expect:
o Places where sudden changes in temperature and humidity are expected,
even though the condition is within the range written above.
o Places where direct sunlight or excessive lighting are expected.
o Places where air conditioners blow directly.
MUTOH recommends that the printer should be installed where air conditioning can
be adjusted easily.


3.4.1.2. Required space

Install the product on a flat surface that fulfills the following conditions.


Notes :

Refer to Product Specifications of the User's Guide for the information of the
product.



a 1500mm
b 1500mm
c 2500mm
d 600mm
e 1250mm

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




39
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

3.4.2. Installing the printer

To install the product, follow the steps below.

Step 1 : Move the product to where it will be installed.

Step 2 : Rotate the four adjusters in the direction shown in the figure to make the printer stable.

Step 3 : Jiggle the printer to make sure that it stable.



1 Adjuster
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




40
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




41
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4. PARTS REPLACEMENT
4.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains the procedures for replacing and removing maintenance parts.


Important :

Before replacing parts, be sure to perform following operations.
Turn the power OFF.
Remove the electrical cable from the socket. Otherwise, you may
suffer electric shock or the machines electric circuits may be
damaged.
Disconnect all cables from the machine. Not doing so could cause
damage to the printer.



Caution :

Assembling and disassembling the printer is only allowed for the parts for which
disassembling procedures are shown in the operation manual.
Do not disassemble any frame parts or parts for which disassembling procedures
are not shown in the manual.
Doing so may cause trouble that cannot be restored, as the printer is originally
assembled in the factory with a high accuracy of 1/100 mm.



Notes :

After replacing the parts, perform necessary lubrication/bonding according to
"Lubrication/Bonding".



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




42
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2. REMOVING THE COVER
When replacing any of the parts inside the printer, it is necessary to remove all covers.
The procedures for removing the covers are given below.


1 = I/H cover 5 = Panel unit assembly
2 = Side cover R 6 = Y-rail cover
3 = side Cover L 7 = Front paper guide
4 = Front cover


8 = Rear paper guide


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




43
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2.1. Removing the I/H cover
Step 1 : Remove the ink cartridge.

Step 2 : Open the I/H cover lid.

Step 3 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the I/H cover.

Step 4 : Remove the I/H cover and I/H cover lid.



1 = Screws (M3x12) fixing the I/H cover

Step 5 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the ink cover sensor.

Step 6 : Remove the ink cover sensor.



1 = Ink cover sensor 2 = Screws (M2x10) fixing the ink cover sensor

Step 7 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 8 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




44
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2.2. Removing side cover R
Step 1 : Remove the screw from the upper part of the side cover R.



1 = Screws (M4x12) on the upper part of the side cover R

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws from the bottom of side cover R.



1 = Screws (M4x16) on the side of the bottom of side cover R

Step 3 : Remove the 3 screws from the back of the bottom of side cover R.



1 = Screws (M4x16) on the back of the bottom of side cover R

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




45
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 4 : Remove the top of the side cover R.

Step 5 : Remove the 4 bolts from the front and back of the inner surface on the bottom of side cover R
and the front cover nut.



1 = Hexagon socket head cap screws (M4x16) 2 = Cover nut

Step 6 : Remove the 6 bolts from the front and back of the bottom surface on the bottom of the side cover
R.

Step 7 : Remove the bottom of side cover R.



1 = Hexagon socket head cap screws (M5x18)

Step 8 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 9 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




46
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2.3. Removing side cover L

Step 1 : Remove the screw from the side of the upper part of side cover L.



1 = Screws (M4x12) on the side of the upper part of the side cover L

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws from the front of the bottom of side cover L.



1 = Screws (4x16) on the back of the bottom of side cover L

Step 3 : Remove the 3 screws from the back of the bottom of side cover L.



1 = Screws (M4x16) on the rear of the bottom part of the side cover L

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




47
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 4 : Remove the 4 bolts and cover nut from the front and back of the inner surface on the bottom of
side cover L.



1 = Hexagon socket head cap screws (M4x16) 2 = Cover nut

Step 5 : Remove the 6 bolts from the front and back of the bottom surface on the bottom of side cover L.



1 = Hexagon socket head cap screws (M5x18)

Step 6 : Remove the bottom of side cover L.

Step 7 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 8 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




48
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2.4. Removing the front cover
Step 1 : Open the front cover.

Step 2 : Remove the Support containing the slow running wheel (Left side of the printer)


1 = Support with slow running wheel

Step 3 : Remove the E-ring (Left side of the printer)


1 = E ring 2 = Grip tool

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




49
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 4 : Remove the 2 screws on the left cover spindles.



2 = Screws (M3x8) right cover spindles

Step 5 : Loose (not remove ! ) the 2 screws of the right spindle a little.



1 = E ring 2 = Screws (M3x8) left cover spindles

Step 6 : Remove the sensor assy.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




50
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 7 : Remove the left cover spindle with the wheel in once.


1 = Spindle left with wheel

Step 8 : Remove the front cover

Step 9 : Reinstall all components in the opposite way


Notes

Make sure the spindle is oriented in the right direction when fixing the front cover to it. The spindle is fixed to
the front cover in the open position. The ridge of the wheel on the spindle must point in the forward direction
(see photo below)




1 = Flat (top) side of the spindle 3 = Front Cover
2 = Ridge on the wheel 4 = Screws for fixing the cover to the spindle (LEFT)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




51
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 10 : Alignment of the sensor (height adjust)

The sensor assy has to be aligned when (re)assembling it.



Caution


Height adjust of the sensor is necessary ! In order to make the sensor well function and keeping it,
the pressure of the wheel-cam on the lever of the sensor may not be too high. A little margin must be
contained when the front cover is in the most downwards position. In this position make sure the
sensor is switched (!), but that there is still a little margin so the sensor lever can be pushed even
further.




1 = Holes / Screws for fixing and adjusting the sensor assy

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




52
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2.5. Removing the panel unit assembly
Step 1 : Remove side cover R.

Step 2 : Remove the panel tape power cord.

Step 3 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the panel base.

1 = Panel unit assembly 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the panel unit assembly
3 = Tape wire

Step 4 : Remove the panel unit assembly.

Step 5 : Remove the 6 screws fixing the panel board assembly and the panel cover.

1 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the panel cover

Step 6 : Remove the panel cover.

Step 7 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the panel bracket and the panel board assembly.

1 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the panel board assembly

Step 8 : Replace the panel board assembly.

Step 9 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




53
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2.6. Removing the Y rail cover


Caution :

Removing the Y rail cover, should be performed by at least two persons.
Otherwise the Y rail cover may be deformed.


Step 1 : Remove side cover R.

Step 2 : Remove side cover L.

Step 3 : Remove the front cover.

Step 4 : Remove the 3 screws fixing the Y rail cover and the Y rail cover FG.



1 = Y rail cover FG 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the Y rail cover and the Y rail cover FG

Step 5 : Remove the 6 screws from the front of the Y rail cover.



1 = Screws (M4x8) on the front of the Y rail cover

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




54
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 6 : Remove the 5 screws from the rear of the Y rail cover.
If the machine is an 90-inch model, there are 8 screws on the rear Y rail cover.



1 = Screws (M4x8) on the rear of the Y rail cover

Step 7 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 8 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 9 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


4.2.7. Removing front paper guide
Step 1 : Remove side cover L.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove the front cover.

Step 4 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 5 : Remove the screws from the top of front media guide.


Notes :

Please note that the amount of screws is size dependent.



Spitfire


1 = Screws on the top of front media guide

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




55
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 6 : Remove the screws from the front of front media guide.


Notes :

Please note that the amount of screws is size dependent.



Spitfire

1 = Screws on the front of front media guide

Step 7 : Standing before the unit move the front paper guide towards you.

Step 8 : Loosen the cables from their cable clamps.

Step 9 : Carefully loosen the connectors


Notes :

Be sure not to damage the cables or connectors.


Step 10 : Remove the front paper guide.

Step 11 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 12 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




56
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


4.2.8. Removing rear paper guide

Step 1 : Remove side cover L.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove the front cover.

Step 4 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 5 : Remove the screws from the top of the rear media guide.


Notes :

Please note that the amount of screws is size dependent.



1 = Screws on the rear paper guide

Step 6 : Remove the screws from the rear of rear paper guide.


Notes :

Please note that the amount of screws is size dependent.


Step 7 : Standing at the rear of the unit move the rear paper guide towards you.

Step 8 : Loosen the cables from their cable clamps.

Step 9 : Carefully loosen the connectors


Notes :

Be sure not to damage the cables or connectors.


Step 10 : Remove the rear paper guide.

Step 11 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 12 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




57
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.2.9. Removing the head cover

Step 1 : Remove the I/H cover.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove side cover L.

Step 4 : Remove the front cover.

Step 5 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 6 : Unlock the head.


Notes :

Please refer to the Head lock menu.


Step 8 : Pull the head out to the left of the maintenance station.


Caution :

When pulling the head out, do not press on the cutter cap. Doing so could damage the
cutter blade.


Step 9 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the head cover.



1 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the head cover

Step 10 : Remove the head cover.

Step 11 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 12 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




58
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


4.2.10. Removing the maintenance cover

Step 1 : Remove the 6 screws fixing the maintenance cover.

Spitfire

1 = Screws (M3x8) 1 = Screws (M3x8)

Step 2 : Remove the maintenance cover.

Step 3 : Replace the parts inside the printer.

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




59
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.3. REPLACEMENT OF THE HEATER ELEMENT
To replace a heater element of the Spitfire printer, please follow the instructions mentioned in the explanation
of the appropriate heater element.

o 1. Replacing the dryer (Heater D)
o 2. Replacing the post-fixer (Heater C)
o 3. Replacing the fixer (Heater B)
o 4. Replacing the heater (Heater A)


Caution :

In case the fuse of the heating element is locked, do not replace the fuse but replace
the appropriate heater element. Installation of a fuse of the heater element needs to
be done in a special production environment.



Important :

Before replacing parts, be sure to perform the following operations.
Turn the machine power OFF.
Remove the product's electrical plug from the socket. Otherwise, you may
suffer electric shock or the machines electric circuits may be damaged.
Disconnect all cables from the machine. Not doing so could cause damage to
the printer.



4.3.1. Heater elements

4.3.1.1. Replacing the dryer (Heater D) on a Spitfire

Before replacing the dryer, make sure to have following items:
65 model : Dryer D1 64 and Dryer D2 64
90 model : Dryer D1 87 and Dryer D2 872 x sensor insul. Patch

To replace the dryer on a Spitfire, please follow the instructions mentioned below.

Step 1 : Remove side cover L.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove the front cover.

Step 4 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 5 : Remove the front paper guide.

Step 6 : Remove the dryer strip(s).

Step 7 : Degrease the plate.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




60
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Notes :

Make sure the plate is cleaned properly. Dust, glue and other parts must be
removed.


Step 8 : Stick the dryer strip(s) onto the plate.


Notes :

Make sure that the strips connect properly.
Please make sure that the sensor (blue blocks) are positioned on the flat surface of
the front paper guide.
Stick it as close as possible to the assembly holes. Make sure it does not touch the
assembly holes.



Notes :

Please make sure that there are no air bubbles under the heater strip. Air bubbles
below the heater strip could cause overheating of the heater strip.


Step 9 : Stick onto the sensors a sensor insul. patch.


1 = sensor insul. patch 2 = assembly hole

Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

During reinstallation of the plate, make sure there are no cables stuck.


4.3.1.2. Replacing the post fixer (Heater C) on a Spitfire

Before replacing the heater, make sure to have following items:
65 model : Post Fixer C 64
90 model : Post Fixer C 87
1 x sensor insul. Patch

To replace the post fixer on a Spitfire, please follow the instructions mentioned below.

Step 1 : Remove side cover L.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove the front cover.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




61
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 4 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 5 : Remove the front paper guide.

Step 6 : Remove the post fixer strip.

Step 7 : Degrease the plate.


Notes :

Make sure the plate is cleaned properly. Dust, glue and other parts must be
removed.


Step 8 : Stick the post fixer strip onto the plate.


Notes :

Make sure that the strips connect properly.
Stick it as close as possible to the assembly holes. Make sure it does not touch the
assembly holes.



Notes :

Please make sure that there are no air bubbles under the heater strip. Air bubbles
below the heater strip could cause overheating of the heater strip.


Step 9 : Stick onto the sensor a sensor insul. patch.


1 = sensor insul. patch 2 = assembly hole

Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

During reinstallation of the plate, make sure there are no cables stuck.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




62
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


4.3.1.3. Replacing the fixer (Heater B1 and Heater B2) on a Spitfire
Before replacing the fixer, make sure to have following items:
65 model : Fixer B1 64 and Fixer B2 64
90 model : Fixer B1 87 and Fixer B2 87
Isolation tape
Plot platform calibre

To replace the fixer on a Spitfire, please follow the instructions mentioned below.

Step 1 : Remove side cover L.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove the front cover.

Step 4 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 5 : Remove the front paper guide.

Step 6 : Place the plot platform calibre onto the plot platforms.



1 = plot platforms 2 = plot platform calibre onto the plot platforms

Step 7 : Fix the plot platform calibre (heater tool) onto the plot platform.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




63
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 8 : Remove the screws of the plot platform.


1 = screws plot platform

Step 9 : Pull upwards the plot platform calibre and so remove the plot platform with fixer.

Step 10 : Remove the fixer.

Step 11 : Degrease the plot platform.


Notes :

Make sure the plate is cleaned properly. Dust, glue and other parts must be
removed.


Step 12 : Stick the two fixer strips onto the plot platform.


Notes :

Please make sure that there are no air bubbles under the heater strip. Air bubbles
below the heater strip could cause overheating of the heater strip.


Step 13 : Stick the isolation tape onto the heater strips.


1 = plot platform 2 = fixer heater strip
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




64
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

3 = isolation tape

Step 14 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

During reinstallation of the plate, make sure there are no cables stuck.


4.3.1.4. Replacing the heater (Heater A) on a Spitfire

Before replacing the post fixer, make sure to have following items:
65 model : Heater A 64
90 model : Heater A 87
2 x press plate
Silicone glue

To replace the heater on a Spitfire, please follow the instructions mentioned below.

Step 1 : Remove side cover L.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove the front cover.

Step 4 : Remove the Y rail cover.

Step 5 : Remove the rear paper guide.

Step 6 : Remove the heater strip.

Step 7 : Degrease the plate.


Notes :

Make sure the plate is cleaned properly. Dust, glue and other parts must be
removed.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




65
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 8 : Stick the heater strip onto the plate.


Notes :

Please make sure that there are no air bubbles under the heater strip. Air bubbles
below the heater strip could cause overheating of the heater strip.




Step 9 : Stick (with silicone glue) the two press plates onto the heater strip.



65 model : X = 380 mm / Y = 1060 mm
90 model : X = 660 mm / Y = 1200 mm / Z = 1750 mm


Notes :

It will take 1 hour to let the glue dry.


Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

During reinstallation of the plate, make sure there are no cables stuck.





Spitfire Maintenance Manual




66
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.4. REPLACING BOARD BASES
This chapter explains the procedures for replacing the power source board assembly, mainboard assembly,
PCI_Linux board assembly and cooling fan assembly.


Caution :

When handling circuit boards, do not touch the elements on the board with your bare
hands. Doing so may cause static electricity and break the elements.

4.4.1 Replacing the Mainboard assembly, HDD_Extension board
assembly, HEAD_DRV board assembly, PCI_Linux board assembly
and cooling fan assembly


Notes

Before replacing the mainboard, discharging the capacitors on the power supply is needed.
Follow these instructions :
Step 1: Switch off the device (Push Power ON/OFF key)

Step 2: Unplug the power cable

Step 3: Push the Power ON/OFF key again
The Display of the device lights up once more for a short time and goes out.
The Capacitors of the power supply are now discharged.

Step 4: Push the Power ON/OFF key again
The switch is now in the OFF position (and safe to plug the power cord again after the repair).

Now its safe to open the machine and replace boards.




Notes

Before replacing the mainboard, be sure to backup your parameters with a flashcard. Please follow the
instructions in the maintenance manual.



Step 1 : Remove the power cable

Step 2: Power ON the machine, this to remove the rest voltage from the capacitors and main supply.
The display and LEDs will light up for a second and rest voltage will be removed

Step 3 : Remove the right side cover.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




67
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 4 : Remove the mainboard cover 3 by loosening the 20 screws.



Step 5 : Disconnect the cooling fan cables.



Step 6 : Remove the display panel (4screws) and flatcable.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




68
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 7 : Remove the mainboard cover by loosening the 16 screws.



Step 8 : Remove the bracket by loosening the 2 screws, this to have more accessibility to the mainboard



Step 9 : Remove the PCI_Linux board assembly by loosening the 2 screws.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




69
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 10 : Remove the hard disk assembly by loosening the 3 screws.



Step 11 : Remove the HEAD_DRV board and FCC protection by loosening the 4 screws.



Step 12 : Remove the hard disk brackets and FCC protection by loosening the 4 screws.



Step 13 : Remove the RAM out of the slot and put it in the new mainboard.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




70
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 14 : Remove the Centronics interface by loosening the two screws.



Step 15 : Disconnect following cables.

N Connector N # of pins Colour Connected to Remarks
1 J101 12 White Main Power Lock type
2 J102 6 White 12 V Power Lock type
3 J103 168 DIMM
4 J104 68
5 J105 28 White or black Display Panel Lock type
6 J106 120 PCI_LINUX board
9 J109 39
10 J110 96 White HD_MOTHER board
11 J111 3 White Adhesion FAN 1 Free
12 J112 2 Blue Adhesion FAN 2 For 65, 90 inch spec
13 J113 2 Red Adhesion FAN 3 For 65, 90 inch spec
14 J114 2 Yellow Adhesion FAN 4 For 65, 90 inch spec
15 J115 2 Black Adhesion FAN 5 For 65, 90 inch spec.
16 J116 2 White Adhesion FAN 6 For 90 inch spec.
17 J117 3 Yellow Free
18 J118 3 Black DRV_FAN 1
19 J119 No preparation
20 J120 3 Red Waste fluid BOX sensor
cable

21 J121 4 White Ink cover sensor
22 J122 5 White Lever foot SW cable
23 J123 4 Black Lever up sensor Transmission photosensor
24 J124 4 Yellow Lever down sensor Transmission photosensor
25 J125 6 White Maintenance origin sensor
cable
Transmission photosensor
26 J126 No preparation
27 J127 5 Red Head slide sensor
28 J128 5 Yellow P_REAR_L sensor
29 J129 4 Blue P_REAR_R sensor
30 J130 4 CR origin sensor Transmission photosensor
31 J131 5 Black Wiper origin sensor Transmission photosensor
32 J132 No preparation
33 J133 30 White or black JUNCTION board Lock type
34 J134 30 White or black JUNCTION board Lock type
35 J135 HEAD_DRV board
36 J136 HEAD_DRV board
37 J137 30 White or black CR board Lock type
38 J138 30 White or black CR board Lock type
39 J139 30 White or black CR board Lock type
40 J140 30 White or black CR board Lock type
41 J141 30 White or black CR board Lock type
42 J142 30 White or black CR board Lock type
43 J143 30 White or black CR board Lock type
44 J144 30 White or black CR board Lock type
45 J145 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




71
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

46 J146 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
47 J147 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
48 J148 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
49 J149 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
50 J150 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
51 J151 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
52 J152 (87) 30 White or black CR board Lock type
53 J153 5 Black Free
54 J154 5 White PF_ENC
55 J155 3 White Cover R sensor
56 J156 3 Black Cover L sensor
57 J157 2 White PF motor Lock type
58 J158 3 White CR motor Lock type
59 J159 4 White Lever motor Lock type
60 J160 4 White Pump 1 motor
61 J161 5 White Pump 2 motor
62 J162 6 White HEAD U/D motor
63 J163 7 White Maintenance U/D motor
64 J164 4 White Wiper motor
65 J165
66 J167 7 White Interf. Cable Db9-Jst

Step 16 : Remove the mainboard assembly by loosening the 6 screws and 4 hexagon spacers.

Step 17 : To install new mainboard, please follow the procedure backwards.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




72
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


4.4.2. Replacing the power source board assembly


Caution :

When removing the power source board assembly, remove the power cable and set it
aside for at least 5 minutes in order to completely discharge the electric charge
remaining in the electrolytic capacitor before continuing with the procedure.
Touching the substrate before discharging the capacitor causes electric shock.



Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the Mainboard assembly, HDD_Extension board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board assembly, PCI_Linux board assembly and cooling fan assembly" to remove
the Mainboard assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the PS board cover.



1 = PS board cover 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the PS board cover

Step 3 : Remove the 5 screws fixing the Mainboard base.



1 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the Mainboard base 2 = Mainboard base

Step 4 : Remove the Mainboard base.

Step 5 : Remove the following connectors from the power source board assembly.

N Connector N # of pins Colour Connected to Remarks
1 CN2 3 White Mainboard J101
2 CN3 4 White + 5V adhesion FAN Output four adhesion FAN
3 CN4 12 White Mainboard J101
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




73
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 6 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the power source.



1 = Power source board assembly 2 = Screws (M4x8) fixing the power board assembly
3 = Hexagon nut fixing the power board assembly 4 = Power source
5 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the power source

Step 7 : Replace the power source.

Step 8 : Remove the 2 screws and 2 hexagon nuts fixing the power source board assembly.

Step 9 : Remove the power source board assembly.

Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When installing the mainboard assembly, be careful not to pinch the foot SW cables
by the mainboard base.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




74
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.4.3. Replacing the inlet assembly, inlet board assembly and lever foot
SW cable assembly

Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the Mainboard assembly, HDD_Extension board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board assembly, PCI_Linux board assembly and cooling fan assembly" to remove
the Mainboard assembly.

Step 2 : Follow step 2 to 4 in "Replacing the power source board assembly" to remove the Mainboard
assembly.

Step 3 : Remove the connector between the inlet board assembly and the inlet assembly.

Step 4 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the inlet board assembly.



1 = Inlet board assembly 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the inlet board assembly
3 = Inlet assembly 4 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the inlet assembly and
lever foot SW cable assembly
5 = Screw (M4x8) fixing the inlet assembly 6 = Lever foot SW cable assembly

Step 5 : Replace the inlet board assembly.

Step 6 : Remove the 3 screws fixing the inlet assembly.

Step 7 : Replace the inlet assembly.

Step 8 : Remove the 3 screws fixing the lever foot SW cable assembly.

Step 9 : Replace the lever foot SW cable assembly.

Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




75
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.4.4. Replacing the JUNCTION board assembly


Notes :

To replace board and connect or disconnect the FFC type cable, you should leave
the plug disconnected from the power socket for a while. Otherwise, over-current
could be generated and damage the board.

Remove the following parts before replacing the JUNCTION board assembly.
I/H cover: refer to "Removing the I/H cover"
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"


Step 1 : Remove following connectors from the JUNCTION board assembly.

N Connector N # of pins Colour Connected to Remarks
1 J401 30 White Mainboard J134 Lock type or Plug-in
2 J402 30 White Mainboard J133 Lock type or Plug-in
3 J403 4 White Ink sensor K Cartridge 1
4 J404 4 Black Ink sensor C Cartridge 2
5 J405 4 Red Ink sensor M Cartridge 3
6 J406 4 Yellow Ink sensor Y Cartridge 4
7 J407 4 Blue Ink sensor LC Cartridge 5
8 J408 5 White Ink sensor LM Cartridge 6
9 J409 5 Black Ink sensor O Cartridge 7
10 J410 5 Red Ink sensor G Cartridge 8
11 J411 5 Yellow SC cable K Cartridge 1
12 J412 5 Blue SC cable C Cartridge 2
13 J413 6 White SC cable M Cartridge 3
14 J414 6 Black SC cable Y Cartridge 4
15 J415 6 Red SC cable LC Cartridge 5
16 J416 6 Yellow SC cable LM Cartridge 6
17 J417 6 Blue SC cable O Cartridge 7
18 J418 7 White SC cable G Cartridge 8

Step 2 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the JUNCTION board assembly.



1 = JUNCTION board assembly 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the JUNCTION board assembly

Step 3 : Replace the JUNCTION board assembly.

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




76
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5. REPLACING THE PF ACTUATOR
4.5.1. Replacing the PF motor assembly


Caution :

The motor is hot after the product has been operated, so be careful not to burn yourself.



Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the parts in the PF motor assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Media guide F: refer to "Removing media guide F"


Step 1 : Remove the PF motor assembly connector from the PF motor cable assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the X motor installation board to the side of the L side frame.



1 = Screws (M4x10) fixing the X motor installation
board to the side of the L side frame.
2 = Screws (M4x10) fixing the PF motor assembly to
the X motor installation board.
3 = PF deceleration belt

Step 3 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the PF motor assembly to the X motor installation board.

Step 4 : Replace the PF motor assembly.


Notes :

When installing the PF motor assembly, move the PF deceleration pulley manually
and confirm that the PF deceleration belt is set equally in the center of the PF motor
assembly pulley.


Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 6 : Adjust the tension of the PF deceleration belt according to "PF deceleration belt tension
adjustment".
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




77
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.2. Replacing the PF_ENC assembly and PF scale assembly


Notes :

Remove the following covers before replacing the PF_ENC assembly.
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"


Step 1 : Remove the PF_ENC assembly connector.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the PF encoder installation board.

1 = Bearing 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the PF scale installation board
3 = PF scale 4 = Screws (M4x10) fixing the PF encoder installation board

Step 3 : Remove the PF encoder installation board.

Step 4 : Remove the bearing.

Step 5 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the PF scale installation board.

Step 6 : Remove the PF scale installation board.

Step 7 : Replace the PF scale assembly.

Step 8 : Remove the screws fixing the PF_ENC assembly to the PF encoder installation board.


1 = PF_ENC assembly 2 = Screws (M2x6) fixing the PF_ENC assembly to
the PF encoder installation board
3 = PF encoder installation board

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




78
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 9 : Replace the PF_ENC assembly.


Notes :

When installing the PF_ENC assembly and the PF encoder installation board, make
sure they are aligned with the locating bosses.

Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 11 : Adjust the tension of the PF deceleration belt according to "PF deceleration belt tension
adjustment".

4.5.3. Replacing the PF deceleration pulley assembly


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the parts in the PF motor assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Media guide F: refer to "Removing media guide F"


Step 1 : Follow step 1 to 6 in "Replacing the PF_ENC assembly and PF scale assembly" to remove the
PF scale installation board.

Step 2 : Loosen the set screw fixing the coupling.



1 = Coupling 2 = Set screw fixing the coupling
3 = Y deceleration pulley axis

Step 3 : Pull the Y deceleration pulley to the opposite side of the origin and then remove the deceleration
pulley assembly.

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 5 : Adjust the tension of the PF deceleration belt according to "PF deceleration belt tension
adjustment".


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




79
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.4. Replacing the PF deceleration belt


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the parts in the PF motor assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Media guide F: refer to "Removing media guide F"


Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the PF motor assembly" to remove the PF motor.

Step 2 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the PF_ENC assembly and PF scale assembly" to remove
the PF_ENC assembly and the PF scale assembly.

Step 3 : Replace the PF deceleration belt.


1 = PF deceleration belt

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 5 : Adjust the tension of the PF deceleration belt according to "PF deceleration belt tension
adjustment".


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




80
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.5. Replacing the P_REAR_R sensor assembly and P_REAR_L
sensor assembly

Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the P_REAR_R sensor assembly and
P_REAR_L sensor assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Media guide F: refer to "Removing media guide F"


Step 1 : Remove the connectors for the P_REAR_R sensor assembly and P_REAR_L sensor assembly
from the Mainboard assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the screw fixing the media sensor installation board.


1 = Media sensor installation board 2 = Screw (M3x8) fixing the media sensor installation board

Step 3 : Remove the media sensor installation board.

Step 4 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.


1 = P_REAR_R sensor assembly 2 = Screws (M2x5) fixing the P_REAR_R sensor assembly

Step 5 : Replace the P_REAR_R sensor assembly.

Step 6 : Use the same procedure to replace the P_REAR_L sensor assembly.

Step 7 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




81
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.6. Replacing the suction fan assembly


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the suction fan assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Media guide F: refer to "Removing media guide F"


Step 1 : Remove the suction fan assembly connector from the suction fan cable assembly.

Step 2 : When replacing the suction fan cable assembly, first remove the connector from the Mainboard
assembly.

Step 3 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the suction fan assembly.



1 = Suction fan assembly 2 = Screws (M3x12) fixing the suction fan assembly

Step 4 : Replace the suction fan assembly.

Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




82
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.7. Replacing the lever motor assembly and the arm motor
installation board

Caution :

The motor is hot after the product has been operated, so be careful not to burn yourself.



Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the lever motor.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Media guide F: refer to "Removing media guide F"


Step 1 : Remove the lever motor assembly connector.

Step 2 : Remove the screw fixing the sensor installation board.



1 = Sensor installation board 2 = Screw (M3x8) fixing the sensor installation board

Step 3 : Remove the sensor installation board.

Step 4 : Remove the hexagon socket head screws with spring washers (3) fixing the CR motor assembly
to the arm motor installation board.



1 = Lever motor assembly 2 = Hexagon socket head screws with spring
washers (M4x10)
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




83
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 5 : Replace the CR motor assembly.

Step 6 : Remove the hexagon socket head screws with spring washers (2) fixing the arm motor
installation board.



1 = Arm motor installation board 2 = Hexagon socket head screws with spring washers
(M4x10)

Step 7 : Replace the arm motor installation board.

Step 8 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




84
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.8. Replacing the transmission photosensor


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the transmission photosensor.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


(1) Replacing the transmission photosensor (lever motor side)
Step 1 : Remove the screw fixing the sensor installation board.

1 = Sensor installation board 2 = Screw (M3x8) fixing the sensor installation board

Step 2 : Remove the sensor installation board.

Step 3 : Remove the transmission photosensor from the sensor installation board.

1 = Sensor installation board 2 = Connector
3 = Transmission photosensor

Step 4 : Remove the connector from the transmission photosensor.

Step 5 : Remove the transmission photosensor.

Step 6 : Apply the screw lock to the tab portions of the transmission photosensors to be installed.

Step 7 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When installing the U/D cable assembly onto the transmission photosensor, be
careful not to confuse the connectors.
Lever up cable assembly (white): front
Lever down cable assembly (blue): rear


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




85
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Replacing the transmission photosensor (CR origin side)


Notes :

Refer to Head Lock Menu


Step 1 : Unlock the head.

Step 2 : Move the carriage from the capping position to the left.

Step 3 : Remove the transmission photosensor from the ORG sensor installation board.



1 = ORG sensor installation board 2 = Connector
3 = Transmission photosensor


Notes :

The ORG sensor installation board has been adjusted at the origin in factory. Do
not loosen the fixed screws.


Step 4 : Remove the connector from the transmission photosensor.

Step 5 : Remove the transmission photosensor.

Step 6 : Apply the screw lock to the tab portions of the transmission photosensors to be installed.

Step 7 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




86
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.5.9. Replacing the flushing box assembly
1) Installing the bracket

Step 1 : Unlock the head (In User mode > SetupMenu 6/7)

*WiperClean*
F1 No Yes F2

(1/1)


Notes:

Following display will appear.

*WiperClean*
Changed Wiper?
Press ENTER


After job is done, press the ENTER key, and the head will lock again.


Step 2 : The carriage moves to the waiting position for replacing the flushing sponge.

Step 3 : Remove the screw fixing the old flushing box assembly



Nr. Part Description
1 Screw fixing flushing box assembly
2 Flushing Box assembly
3 Tube

Step 4 : Remove the tube from the flushing box assembly

Step 5 : Connect the tube to the new flushing box assembly (KY-35080)

Step 6 : Install the new flushing box assembly and fix the screw.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




87
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 7 : Adjust the head and flushing box height.

Before adjustment of the flushing box height position, please make sure to have the Flush Box
Height Jig Tool (JD-80001)

1) Place the flushing box height jig tool on the flushing box as shown below:


2) Turn the wheel of the carriage until the arrow is on the bottom so the carriage is in the lowest
position.


Nr. Part Description
1 Carriage wheel
2 Arrow

3) Carefully move the carriage to the right. The carriage should pass the first interval but not the
second.


Nr. Part Description
1 Interval 1
2 Interval 2
3 Reference of the head

4) When the carriage passes both intervals, move the carriage to the left. Loosen the adjustment
screw of the flushing box a bit and put the flushing box on the correct height and then tighten the
screw.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




88
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05





Notes:

Check in headheight low if the heads does not interfere with the backside of the
bracket. If there is interference, you have to lower the spitting box.

Nr. Part Description
1 Heads
2 Spitting box
3 Bracket
4 Crucial point where heads pass the bracket


Step 8 : Lock the head

Step 9 : The installation of the new flushing box is finished.

2) Replacing the sponge (KY-42889).


Notes:

Replace the sponge in these situations:

after one month (periodical service by end user)
the sponge bends or is saturated
inkdrops on the media can be caused by a saturated or bended sponge


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




89
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Notes:

Use gloves and tweezers to change the absorbent in the flushing box.


Step 1 : Unlock the head (In User mode > SetupMenu 6/7)

*WiperClean*
F1 No Yes F2

(1/1)


Notes:

Following display will appear.

*WiperClean*
Changed Wiper?
Press ENTER


After job is done, press the ENTER key, and the head will lock again.


Step 2 : The carriage moves to the waiting position for replacing the flushing sponge.

Step 3 : Remove the old absorbents with tweezers.



Nr. Part Description
1 Sponge (KY-42889)
2 Tweezers
3 Gloves

Step 4 : Install the new absorbents in the flushing box. Make sure that the 2 holes are on the right side of
the flushing box and that the pins of the black box are in the holes of the absorbent.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




90
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Nr. Part Description
1 Two holes
2 Pin of black box

Step 5 : Lock the head

3) Replacing the spitting box (DE-35085).


Notes:

Replacing the black box is a part of the periodical services done by the end user. It
should be done every 6 months.


Step 1 : Unlock the head

*WiperClean*
F1 No Yes F2

(1/1)


Notes:

Following display will appear.

*WiperClean*
Changed Wiper?
Press ENTER


After job is done, press the ENTER key, and the head will lock again.


Step 2 : The carriage moves to the waiting position for replacing the black box.

Loosen the screw tightening the black box to the bracket and replace the black box.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




91
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Nr. Part Description
1 Black Box
2 Bracket
3 Screw

Tighten the screw and lock the head.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




92
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6. REPLACING THE CR ACTUATOR
4.6.1. Replacing the CR motor assembly


Caution :

The motor is hot after the product has been operated, so be careful not to burn yourself.



Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the CR motor assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Media guide F: refer to "Removing media guide F"


Step 1 : Remove the CR motor cable assembly connector from the CR motor assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 4 hexagon socket head cap screws fixing the CR motor assembly.

Step 3 : Replace the CR motor assembly.

Step 4 : Connect the white wire to the connector indicated whit the red label.

1 = Red label 2 = Connector
3 = White wire

Step 5 : Adjust the tension of the CR deceleration belt according to "CR deceleration belt tension
adjustment".


Notes :

When installing the CR motor cable assembly connector, install the white cable on
the right side as shown in the previous figure.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




93
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6.2. Replacing the steel belt


Caution :

When replacing the steel belt, be careful not to cut your hands by the belt.



Notes :

Do not damage the steel belt.

Remove following covers before replacing the steel belt.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Unlock the head.


Notes :

Refer to Head Lock Menu


Step 2 : Move the carriage from the capping position to the left.

Step 3 : Rotate the 2 steel belt adjustment screws counterclockwise to loosen the steel belt.



1 = Steel belt adjustment screws 2 = Steel belt

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




94
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 4 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the steel belt.



1 = Screws fixing the steel belt 2 = Steel belt

Step 5 : Replace the steel belt.


Notes :

Be careful when handling the steel belt. The steel belt may be cut off when
accreting dust to it or creasing it.


Step 6 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 7 : Perform steel belt tension adjustment according to "Steel belt tension adjustment".


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




95
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6.3. Replacing the SLIDE motor assembly, HD_SLIDE sensor
assembly, and slide motor installation board

Caution :

The motor is hot after the product has been operated, so be careful not to burn yourself.



Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the SLIDE motor assembly, HD_SLIDE
sensor assembly, and slide motor installation board.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Remove the connectors on the SLIDE motor assembly and HD_SLIDE sensor assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the SLIDE motor assembly.


1 = SLIDE motor assembly 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the SLIDE motor assembly
3 = HD_SLIDE sensor assembly 4 = Screws (M2x8) fixing the HD_SLIDE sensor assembly
5 = Slide motor installation board 6 = Screws (M4x6) fixing the slide motor installation board

Step 3 : Replace the SLIDE motor assembly.

Step 4 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the HD_SLIDE sensor assembly.

Step 5 : Replace the HD_SLIDE sensor assembly.

Step 6 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the slide motor installation board.

Step 7 : Replace the slide motor installation board.

Step 8 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 9 : Make sure that the Idler moves smoothly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




96
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6.4. Replacing the T fence (Timing fence or Linear Y-Axis Encoder)


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the T fence.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Remove the T fence from the T fence spring hook on the side of the L side frame.

Spitfire



1 = T fence spring 2 = T fence spring hook
3 = T fence

Step 2 : Remove the screw fixing the T fence push plate.


1 = T fence push plate 2 = Screw (M3x6) fixing the T fence push plate
3 = T fence

Step 3 : Remove the T fence from the hook.

Step 4 : Remove the screw fixing the T fence stationary plate.


1 = T fence stationary plate 2 = T fence
3 = Screw (M3x6) fixing the T fence stationary plate

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




97
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 5 : Remove the T fence from the hook.

Step 6 : Pull out the T fence in the direction of the arrow as shown in the previous figure while being
careful not to damage the CR_ENC assembly.

Step 7 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When installing the T fence, pay attention to the following :
When there is a protective film on the T fence, remove the film and install
the T fence.
Properly install the T fence to the hooks on the T fence stationary plate.
Refer to the figure in step 2.
The T fence and the hooks on the stationary plate must have a loose fit.
When securing the stationary plate with screws, it must be loosened
enough so the T fence can be moved.
Insert the T fence into the hooks on the T fence push plate and the
CR_ENC assembly. Refer to the following figure.




1 = T fence push plate 2 = T fence
3 = CR_ENC assembly

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




98
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6.5. Replacing the CR slave pulley assembly


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the CR slave pulley assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the steel belt" to remove the steel belt.

Step 2 : Replace the CR slave pulley assembly.



1 = CR slave pulley assembly 2 = Steel belt
3 = Bearing stopper

Step 3 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 4 : Perform steel belt tension adjustment according to "Steel belt tension adjustment".


Notes :

Be careful when handling the steel belt. The steel belt may be cut off when
accreting dust to it or creasing it.

The driven pulley shaft is installed one way only. Refer to "Service Parts
List/Exploded Views/Configuration Diagrams", to install it correctly so that the
bearing stoppers are on top.

After installing the CR slave pulley assembly, move the carriage to the left and right
manually to confirm that the steel belt has been set equally in the center of the CR
actuator pulley and the CR slave pulley assembly.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




99
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6.6. Replacing the CR actuator pulley and the CR deceleration belt


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the CR slave pulley.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the CR motor assembly" to remove the CR motor assembly.

Step 2 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the steel belt" to remove the steel belt.

Step 3 : Replace the CR actuator pulley.

Step 4 : Replace the CR deceleration belt.



1 = CR slave pulley 2 = CR deceleration belt

Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 6 : Adjust the tension of the CR deceleration belt according to "CR deceleration belt tension
adjustment".


Notes :

After installing the CR actuator pulley assembly, move the carriage to the left and
right manually to confirm that the steel belt has been set equally in the center of the
CR actuator pulley and the CR slave pulley assembly.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




100
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6.7. Replacing the steel bearer, tube guide, CR tape power cable and
ink tube


Notes :

To replace the board and connect or disconnect the FFC type cable, you should
leave the plug disconnected from the power socket for a while. Otherwise, over-
current could be generated and damage board.

Remove following covers before replacing the steel bearer, tube guide, CR tape
power cable, and ink tube.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Remove the 8 screws fixing the CR cover.



1 = CR cover 2 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the CR cover

Step 2 : Remove the CR tape power cable connector from the CR board assembly and Mainboard
assembly.

Step 3 : Remove the 2 screws fixing cable push plate.

Step 4 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the tube clamp.


1 = CR tape power cable 2 = Steel bearer
3 = Cable push plate 4 = Screws fixing cable push plate (M3x8)
5 = Screws fixing tube clamp (M3x8)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




101
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 5 : Completely remove tube bundles 1 and 2.


1 = Tube bundle 2 = Tube bundle 2

Step 6 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the tube clamp.

Step 7 : Remove the tube clamp.

Step 8 : Remove the coupling screws, O-ring and ink tube from the coupling.

Step 9 : Replace the ink tube.

Step 10 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the cable clamp.

Step 11 : Replace the steel bearing.

Step 12 : Replace the tube guide.

Step 13 : Remove the pipe clamp.

Step 14 : Replace the CR tape power cable.


1 = Tube push plate 2 = Cable clamp
2 = Pipe clamp 3 = Coupling, O-ring, coupling screws
4 = Screws fixing tube push plate (M3x8) 4 = Screws fixing tube cramp (M3x20)

Step 15 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

The CR tape power cables must be bundled during installation so that they can not
move.
The edge of the tube push plate must be upside when installed.
You should soak the O-ring in cleaning liquid once gain before installing it.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




102
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.6.8. Replace the cover R sensor assembly and the cover L sensor
assembly

Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the cover R sensor assembly and the
cover L sensor assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


(1) Replacing the cover R sensor assembly

Step 1 : Remove the cover R sensor assembly connector from the Mainboard assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the cover R sensor assembly.


1 = Cover R sensor assembly 2 = Screws (M2x8) fixing the cover R sensor assembly

Step 3 : Replace the cover R sensor assembly.

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 5 : Perform cover sensor adjustment according to "Cover sensor adjustment".

(2) Replacing the cover L sensor assembly

Step 1 : Remove media guide F.

Step 2 : Remove the cover L sensor assembly connector from the cover L cable.

Step 3 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the cover L sensor assembly.



1 = Cover L sensor assembly 2 = Screws (M2x8) fixing the cover L sensor assembly

Step 4 : Replace the cover L sensor assembly.

Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 6 : Perform cover sensor adjustment according to "Cover sensor adjustment".

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




103
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.7. REPLACING THE CURSOR

4.7.1. Replacing the cutter holder, cutter spring, cutter cap, solenoid
assembly and solenoid spring

(1) Replacing the cutter spring


Step 1 : Open the front cover.

Step 2 : Remove the cutter blade from the cutter holder.

Step 3 : Remove the cutter spring from the cutter holder.



1 = Cutter spring 2 = Cutter holder

Step 4 : Replace the cutter spring.

Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


(2) Replacing the cutter holder, cutter cap, solenoid assembly and solenoid spring



Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the cutter holder, cutter cap, solenoid
assembly, and solenoid spring.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Head cover: refer to "Removing the head cover"


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




104
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 1 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the cutter holder and holder support.



1 = Holder support 2 = Cutter holder
3 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the cutter holder and holder support

Step 2 : Remove the cutter holder.

Step 3 : Remove the cutter blade and cutter spring from the cutter holder.

Step 4 : Remove the cutter cap and Solenoid spring.

Step 5 : Remove the screw fixing the solenoid assembly to the cutter cap.



1 = Cutter cap 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the solenoid assembly to
the cutter cap
3 = Solenoid spring 4 = Solenoid assembly
5 = Screws (M2x4) fixing the solenoid assembly to
the cutter holder
6 = Cutter holder

Step 6 : Replace the cutter cap and solenoid spring.

Step 7 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the solenoid assembly to the cutter holder.

Step 8 : Use a screwdriver to push the solenoid assembly up from the hole on the cutter holder side.

Step 9 : Replace the solenoid assembly.

Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 11 : Adjust the cutter according to "Cutter adjustment".
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




105
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.7.2. Replacing the print head assembly and head tape power cable


Notes :

To replace the board and connect or disconnect the FFC type cable, you should
leave the plug disconnected from the power socket for a while. Otherwise, over-
current could be generated and damage board.

Remove following covers before replacing the print head assembly and head tape
power cable.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Head cover: refer to "Removing the head cover"

The print head assembly has been pre-adjusted. Do not disassemble it.


Step 1 : Drain the ink from all ink paths according to "Head wash menu".

Step 2 : Loosen the 2 screws fixing the damper clamp.



1 = Damper clamp 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the damper clamp

Step 3 : Remove the damper clamp.

Step 4 : Remove the head tape power cable.



1 = Head tape power cable 2 = Damper assembly
3 = Head stationary plate / head spacer 4 = Step-bore screw
5 = Screws (M2.6x5) fixing the head stationary plate 6 = Print head assembly

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




106
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 5 : Remove the damper assembly from the print head assembly.

Step 6 : Remove the screw and step-bore screw fixing the head stationary plate.

Step 7 : Remove the rotation adjustment spring under the head with small flat-head driver or another tool.

Step 8 : Replace the print head assembly.

Step 9 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

Place the removed damper assembly facing upward and fix with tape or place it in a
container to prevent the ink from leaking. Ink adhesion on board may cause faulty
print head.
Align the head tape power cables one by one to each head and paste together with
double-faced tape.
Make sure that the head does not float when installing the head.




A : Insert the concave portion of the head base in the rear of the cursor convex portion of the
cursor.
B : Insert the rotation adjustment spring into the convex portion of the head base on the right
front.

Step 10 : Perform head precision adjustment according to "Head precision adjustment".

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




107
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.7.3. Replacing the H ink tube, tube branch and damper assembly


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the H ink tube, tube branch, and damper
assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Head cover: refer to "Removing the head cover"


Step 1 : Drain the ink from all ink paths according to "Head wash menu".

Step 2 : Follow step 1 in "Replacing the print head assembly and head tape power cable" to remove the
damper clamp.

Step 3 : Remove the ink tube and tube branch from the branch fixing material.



1 = Branch fixing material 2 = Tube branch
3 = Ink tube 4 = H ink tube
5 = Coupling screw, O-ring

Step 4 : Remove the coupling screw and O-ring on the ink tube and the H ink tube sides from the tube
branch.

Step 5 : Replace the tube branch.

Step 6 : Remove the damper assembly from the print head assembly.



1 = Head tape power cable 2 = Damper assembly
3 = Print head assembly 4 = H ink tube, O-ring

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




108
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 7 : Remove the H ink tube, coupling screw and O-ring from the damper assembly.

Step 8 : Replace the damper assembly.

Step 9 : Replace the H ink tube and O-ring.


Notes :

Please soak the O-ring in cleaning liquid before installation.


Step 10 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When tightening coupling screws, finger-tighten those. If using tools, it may result
in cracking where the screws fix damper and fail to fill the ink.

Do not grasp the film area of the damper strongly. Doing so may cause faulty
damper and print failure.


4.7.4. Replacing the CR board assembly


Notes :

To replace the board and connect or disconnect the FFC type cable, you should
leave the plug disconnected from the power socket for a while. Otherwise, over-
current could be generated and damage the board

Remove following covers before replacing the CR board assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Remove the 8 screws fixing the CR cover.



1 = CR cover 2 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the CR cover

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




109
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 2 : Remove following connectors from the CR board.

N Connector N # of pins Colour Connected to Remarks
1 J201 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
2 J202 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
3 J203 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
4 J204 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
5 J205 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
6 J206 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
7 J207 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
8 J208 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
9 J209 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
10 J210 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
11 J211 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
12 J212 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
13 J213 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
14 J214 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
15 J215 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
16 J216 30 White or Black Mainboard Lock type or Plug-in
17 J217 21 White or Black I160B head
18 J218 21 White or Black I160B head
19 J219 21 White or Black I160B head
20 J220 21 White or Black I160B head
21 J221 21 White or Black I160B head
22 J222 21 White or Black I160B head
23 J223 21 White or Black I160B head
24 J224 21 White or Black I160B head
25 J225 21 White or Black I160B head
26 J226 21 White or Black I160B head
27 J227 21 White or Black I160B head
28 J228 21 White or Black I160B head
29 J229 21 White or Black I160B head
30 J230 21 White or Black I160B head
31 J231 21 White or Black I160B head
32 J232 21 White or Black I160B head
33 J233 5 White CR_ENC
34 J234 5 Black P_EDGE sensor
35 J235 2 White Solenoid

Step 3 : Remove the 2 screws and 2 hexagon spacers fixing the CR board assembly.

Step 4 : Replace the CR board assembly.



1 = CR board assembly 2 = Screws fixing the CR board assembly (M3x6)
3 = Hexagon spacers fixing the CR boar

Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




110
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.7.5. Replacing the CR_ENC assembly


Notes :

Remove following cover before replacing the CR_ENC assembly.
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"



Step 1 : Follow step 1 in "Replacing the flushing box assembly" to slide the CR cursor to the left.

Step 2 : Remove the CR_ENC assembly connector from the CR board assembly.

Step 3 : Remove the T fence from the T fence spring, and then from the CR_ENC assembly.

Step 4 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the CR_ENC assembly.



1 = CR_ENC assembly 2 = Screws (M2x12) fixing the CR_ENC assembly

Step 5 : Replace the CR_ENC assembly.

Step 6 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When removing the T fence from the CR_ENC assembly, be careful not to damage
the T fence.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




111
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.7.6. Replacing the P_EDGE sensor assembly


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the P_EDGE sensor Assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Head cover: refer to "Removing the head cover"


Step 1 : Remove the P_EDGE sensor assembly connector from the CR board assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the screw fixing the P_EDGE sensor assembly.

Step 3 : Replace the P_EDGE sensor assembly.



1 = P_EDGE sensor assembly 2 = Screw (M2x12) fixing the P_EDGE sensor
assembly

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 5 : Perform media sensor sensitivity adjustment according to "Media sensor sensitivity adjustment".



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




112
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.7.7. Replacing the CR cursor assembly


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the CR cursor assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Head cover: refer to "Removing the head cover"


Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the cutter holder, cutter spring, cutter cap, solenoid
assembly, and solenoid spring" to "Replacing the P_EDGE sensor assembly " to remove the
parts in cursor components.

Step 2 : Slide the CR cursor assembly to the opposite side of the home position.

Step 3 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the steel belt" to remove the steel belt from the CR cursor.

Step 4 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the CR board installation board.

Step 5 : Remove the CR board installation board.



1 = CR board installation board 2 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the CR board installation board

Step 6 : Remove the T fence.

Step 7 : Remove the CR blade spring.



1 = CR cursor assembly 2 = CR blade spring

Step 8 : Replace CR cursor assembly.

Step 9 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 10 : Perform head height adjustment according to "Head height adjustment".
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




113
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.7.8. Replacing the cursor roller assembly


Notes :

Remove following cover before replacing the Cursor roller assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"
Head cover: refer to "Removing the head cover"


4.7.8.1. Replacing the cursor roller assembly (upper 2 cursor rollers)

Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the CR cursor assembly " to remove the CR cursor
assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the E ring fixing the cursor roller assembly.



1 = CR cursor assembly 2 = E ring fixing the cursor roller assembly.

Step 3 : Replace the cursor roller assembly.

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

Step 5 : Perform head height adjustment according to "Head height adjustment".

4.7.8.2. A. Replacing the cursor roller assembly (6 high-load bearings) : Large bearing
type

Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the CR cursor assembly " to remove the CR cursor
assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the side cursor roller assemblies and B cursor axises together with flat-head driver or
another tool.



1 = CR cursor assembly 2 = B cursor axis

Step 3 : Remove the E ring fixing the cursor roller assembly of downside.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




114
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05




1 = CR cursor assembly 2 = E ring fixing the cursor roller assembly.

Step 4 : Replace the cursor roller assembly.

Step 5 : Install the spacers and the other parts as shown in the following figure.



1 = E ring fixing the side cursor roller assy 2 = High-load bearing of the side cursor roller assy
3 = Brass spacer of the side cursor roller assy 4 = E ring of the cursor roller assy
5 = High-load bearing of the cursor roller assy of downside 6 = Brass spacer of the cursor roller assy

Step 6 : Apply the screw lock to the cursor axis, and install the cursor roller assembly with the axis at the
lower position.


Notes :

Be sure that the screw lock does not contaminate the cursor roller or the spacer.




1 = Applying position of the screw lock

Step 7 : Perform head height adjustment according to "Head height adjustment".
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




115
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.8. REPLACING THE MAINTENANCE STATION AREA
4.8.1. Replacing the Capping Station Assembly (Maintenance Assembly)


Notes :

When replacing the parts inside the maintenance assembly, be sure to perform
following operation to clear the counter.
"High ink initialization" or " Cleaning initialization": refer to "Counter Display
Menu"

Remove following covers before replacing the parts inside the maintenance
assembly.
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Side cover L: refer to "Removing side cover L"
Front cover: refer to "Removing the front cover"
Y rail cover: refer to "Removing the Y rail cover"


Step 1 : Follow step 1 in "Replacing the flushing box assembly" to move the CR cursor to the left.

Step 2 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the Wiper Arm Assy.


1 = screws 2 = wiper arm assy

Step 3 : Remove the wiper arm assy.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




116
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Step 4 : Remove the cover from the pump assembly.

Step 5 : Remove the screw fixing the flushing box installation board.

Step 6 : Remove the flushing box installation board.

Step 7 : Remove the tubes from the pump station


Note :

Be careful when removing the tubing from the nipple. Hold the tubing as close to the
nipple as possible. Turn the tubing left and right until it is coming off. Otherwise the
tubing will stretch and the inner coating layer will be damaged.


(1) Turn the tubing left right and pull gently (2) Stretched and damaged tubing



Notes :

There is some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from the
tube onto the printer or items close to the printer.


Step 8 : Disconnect the electrical wires.

a. Cut the 3 rock-ties (DF-41410)
b. Unplug the wires (on the connectors)

1 = rock ties 2 = connectors
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




117
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 9 : Remove the 6 screws fixing the maintenance assembly.



1= screws (M3x8) fixing the maintenance assembly Position of the holes

Step 10 : Replace the maintenance assembly.


Notes :

Secure the maintenance assembly so that it abuts against the rear right portion.


The connection sequence for the tubes is as follows: Numbers in brackets ( ) are
the cap numbers from left to right as viewed from the front of the main body.


65 and 90 Spitfire





Step 11 : Move the cursor to the opposite side of the origin.

Step 12 : Cap once.

Step 13 : Move the CR Cursor to the left side of the printer.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




118
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 14 : Use the build-in mirror (in the left maintenance cover) to check that the cap does not
impinge on the nozzle.


1 = Print head (nozzle face) 2 = Nozzle
3 = Cap trace 4 = Mirror


Step 15 : Reinstall the rest of the parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure. Make sure
that both cam and gears in the capping station assy are sufficient applied with grease
(KY-80050)

4.8.1. Assembling the Capping Station

Step 1 : Hook the lever of the plastic subassy with the head caps to the hook on the basic plate.
Theres one lever and one hook on the basic plate.


Notes

Turn the wheel on the basic plate until the hook is a little in the up position.






Spitfire Maintenance Manual




119
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 2 : Attach the 2 side supports of the basic plate to the black plastic station



Step 3 : Place the plate with the axes in this position under the basic plate of the capping /
maintenance station and put the cap unit (black plastic part) over the axes. Make sure
that all hooked parts stay hooked. Press the spring and attach two screws (NS-05030061)
to the ends of the axes. At the left side (this means the side of the tin) a round piece is
needed between the screw and the axis.


Plate with Axes


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




120
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Step 4 : Attach both plates with 4x NS-05030051. Determine the position by using the nipples on
the basic plate.



Step 5 : Adjust the ridge so that you arent able anymore to put a sheet of paper between the ridge

Step 6 : Put the 4 black tubes on the nipples as on the pictures below.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




121
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.8.3. Replacing the caps


Notes

Make sure when mounting the caps that with the bearing at the right side the caps black spot is on the under
side and the tube at the back at the upper side.




1 = bearing 3 = tube at the back of the cap
2 = black spot on cap

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




122
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.8.4. Replacing the wiper and wiperarm and replace the sponge

4.8.4.1 Installing the new wipers in the wiperarm and replace the spongne.



Notes :

Be careful not to break the lips of the wiper arm while installing the wipers.

Do not touch the wipers with your bare hands to avoid fat or dirt get in contact with
the wipers and automatically the nozzle plate. Use a pair of tweezers to avoid this.
Clean wipers with appropriate cleaning liquid in case of dirt.


Please follow the procedure mentioned below.

Step 1 : Click the new wipers in the new wiperarm on the positions and manor shown in the pictures.


No. Part
1 Well positioned wiper
2 Malpositioned wiper

For Spitfire 65 and 90



Position 3, 4, 5, 6


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




123
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 2: Replace the sponge



1 Wipers
2 Wiper arm
3 Sponge

4.8.4.2 Installing the wiperarm

Step 1 : Power ON the printer and go to the WiperClean-Menu. This will cause the unlocking of the
carriage. (In User mode > SetupMenu 6/7)

* WiperClean *

Changed wiper?
ENTER

Step 2 : Push the carriage to the left side of the machine so you can remove the four screws of the wiper
assembly.



No. Part
1 Screws

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




124
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 3 : Remove the wiper assembly



1 = Wiper assembly


Notes :

Be careful removing the wiper assembly, so you dont break the sensor located
close to the wiper.


No. Part
1 Sensor


Step 4 : Remove the wiperarm and reinstall the new one.



No. Part
1 Wiperarm assembly
2 T plate
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




125
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 5 : To reinstall the wiper assembly (after installing and cleaning the new wipers) please reverse the
removal procedure.

Step 6 : After complete reinstallation, clean the wipers using Spitfire Cleaning Liquid.

4.8.4.3 Change wiper arm assy, wipers and sponge.

Step 1 : Power ON the printer and go to the WiperClean-Menu. This will cause the unlocking of the
carriage.

* WiperClean *

Changed wiper?
ENTER

Step 2 : Slide the carriage to the left side of the machine so you can remove the four screws of the wiper
assembly.




1 Screws

Step 3 : Remove the wiper assembly (1)




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




126
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 4 : When you have ordered the new wiper arm assembly (MY35381) + wipers (ME-80771), the
complete assembly (except the wipers) will already be assembled.
Install the new wipers onto the new assembly.



Positions : 3, 4, 5, 6

Step 5 : Install the complete assembly onto the machine and tighten the four screws.




1 Screws
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




127
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.8.5. Replacing the SLIDE motor assembly (wiper arm)


Caution :

The motor is hot after the product has been operated, so be careful not to burn yourself.


Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the maintenance assembly" to remove the maintenance
assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the SLIDE motor assembly.



1 = SLIDE motor assembly 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the SLIDE motor assembly

Step 3 : Replace the SLIDE motor assembly.

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




128
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.8.6. Replacing the transmission photosensor (wiper home position
and maintenance home position)
Step 1 : Remove the transmission photosensor from the side plate R.



1 = Transmission photo sensor 2 = cable assembly

Step 2 : Remove each origin cable assembly from the transmission photosensor.

Step 3 : Remove the transmission photosensor.

Step 4 : Apply the screw lock to the tab portions of the transmission photosensors to be installed.

Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When installing the origin cable assembly onto the transmission photosensor, be
careful to not confuse the connectors.
Wiper origin cable assembly (black): front
Maintenance origin cable assembly (white): rear



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




129
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.9. REPLACING THE PUMP AREA
4.9.1. Replacing the pump assembly


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the parts in the PF motor assembly.
Maintenance cover: refer to "Removing the maintenance cover"


Step 1 : Remove the tubes on the maintenance station and those to the waste bottle.


1 = tube connections on the maintenance station
(Connections of the Tubes of the pump station
connected on the maintenance station)
2 = tube connections on the underside of the pump
station (Connections of the tubes going to the waste
bottle)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




130
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05




Note :

Concerning the tube connections on the maintenance station :

Be careful when removing the tubing from the nipple. Hold the tubing as close to the
nipple as possible. Turn the tubing left and right until it is coming off. Otherwise the
tubing will stretch and the inner coating layer will be damaged.


(1) Turn the tubing left right and pull gently (2) Stretched and damaged tubing



Notes :

There is some remaining ink in the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from
the tube onto the printer or items close to the printer.



Notes :

Concerning the tube connections on the underside of the pump assy :

When reconnecting the tubes going to the waste bottle, cut off approximately 5mm
of each tube before putting it on the nipple. This provides a good connection of the
tubes on the nipples.


Step 2 : Disconnect the electrical wires of the pump motors on the connectors.

Step 3 : Remove the 4 screws fixing the pump assembly




1 = Pump assembly 2 = Screws (M3x8) fixing the pump assembly
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




131
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 4 : Replace the pump assembly.

Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

Follow the instructions in "Pump tubing layout for pump assembly" to connect the
tube.


4.9.2. Replacing the pump
Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the pump assembly " to remove the pump assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the screw fixing the pump assembly.



1 = Pump assembly 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the pump assembly

Step 3 : Replace the pump



Pump MY-80300L

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

Follow the instructions in "Pump tubing layout for pump assembly" to connect the
tube.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




132
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.9.3. Replacing the pump motor assembly


Caution :

The motor is hot after the product has been operated, so be careful not to burn yourself.


Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the pump assembly " to remove the pump assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the pump motor assembly.


1 = Pump motor assembly 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the pump motor assembly

Step 3 : Replace the pump motor assembly.

Step 4 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




133
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.10. REPLACING THE CARTRIDGE AREA
4.10.1. Replacing the I/H (ink holder) assembly
There are 8 I/H assembly 's installed in this printer. Following procedure is for the removal of 1 I/H
assembly.


Notes :

Remove following covers before replacing the parts in the I/H assembly.
I/H cover: refer to "Removing the I/H cover"
Side cover R: refer to "Removing side cover R"
Panel unit assembly: refer to "Removing the panel unit assembly"


(1) Removing the I/H assembly

Step 1 : Perform the ink discharge operation to discharge the ink from the inside of all ink paths.


Notes :

For ink draining procedure, refer to "Head wash menu".


Step 2 : Remove the following connectors from the JUNCTION board assembly.
Ink sensor assembly connectors (8)
SC cable assembly connectors (8)


Notes :

For more details of the JUNCTION board assembly connector, refer to "Table
Connectors connected to the JUNCTION board assembly" in "Replacing the
JUNCTION board assembly".


Step 3 : Remove the sensor assembly harnesses removed in step 2 from their clamps.

Step 4 : Pull the harnesses out of the grommets on the board base fixing plate.

Step 5 : Follow the step 1 to 3 in "Replacing the power source board assembly" to remove the Mainboard
base.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




134
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 6 : Remove the 3 screws fixing the P/S board installation board.



Step 7 : Remove the P/S board installation board.

Step 8 : Remove the coupling screws and O-ring from the I/H assembly.

Step 9 : Remove the 4 screws fixing I/C slide 2 and the I/H assembly.



1 = I/H assembly 2 = I/C slide 2
3 = Screws (M3x8) fixing I/C slide 2 and the I/H
assembly


Step 10 : Remove the I/H assembly.

Step 11 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

Please soak the O-ring in cleaning liquid before installation.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




135
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Replacing the ink ID board assembly and the holder pressure spring

Step 1 : Remove the I/H assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the 2 screws fixing the holder pressure spring.



1 = Holder pressure spring (two-ply use) 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the holder pressure spring
3 = Ink ID board assembly 4 = SC cable assembly

Step 3 : Replace the holder pressure spring.

Step 4 : Remove the SC cable assembly connector from the ink ID board assembly.

Step 5 : Replace the ink ID board assembly.

Step 6 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.

(3) Replacing the cartridge frame assembly

Step 1 : Remove the I/H assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the cables from the I/H assembly clamp.

Step 3 : Disengage the hook fixing the cartridge frame assembly, and then slide the cartridge frame
assembly in the direction of the arrow to remove it.

Step 4 : Slide the cartridge frame assembly in the direction of the arrow to remove it.


1 = Cartridge frame assembly 2 = Hook


Step 5 : Replace the cartridge frame assembly.

Step 6 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




136
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



(4) Replacing the ink sensor assembly (ink NOT sensor, ink END sensor)

Step 1 : Remove the I/H assembly.

Step 2 : Remove the cables from the I/H assembly clamp.

Step 3 : Remove the cartridge frame assembly.

Step 4 : Remove the screw fixing the ink END sensor.



1 = Ink END sensor 2 = Screw (M3x10) fixing the ink END sensor

Step 5 : Remove the ink END sensor.

Step 6 : Remove the screw fixing the Ink NOT sensor to the Cartridge frame assembly.



1 = Ink NOT sensor 2 = Screw (M2x8) fixing the ink NOT sensor

Step 7 : Remove the ink NOT sensor.

Step 8 : Replace the ink sensor assembly.

Step 9 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When installing the ink NOT sensor, do not tighten the screw firmly. Otherwise, the
switch may not come out.


Step 10 : Make sure that the Ink NOT sensor switch moves.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




137
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.11. REPLACING SUPPORTS AND SCROLLER
4.11.1. Replacing the waste fluid bottle assembly


Notes :

When replacing the waste fluid bottle assembly, be sure to perform following
operation to clear the counter. "High ink initialization" or " Cleaning initialization":
refer to "Counter Initialization Menu"


Step 1 : Remove the waste fluid bottle assembly.




Caution :

Waste ink will remain inside the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from the tube
onto the printer or items close to the printer.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




138
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4.11.2. Replacing the waste bottle box sensor assembly
Step 1 : Follow the instructions in "Replacing the waste fluid bottle assembly" to remove the waste fluid
bottle assembly.


Caution :

Waste ink will remain inside the tubes. Be careful that the ink is not spilled from the tube
onto the printer or items close to the printer.

Step 2 : Remove the waste liquid BOX sensor assembly connector from the rear side cap R.



1 = Rear side cap R 2 = Waste liquid BOX sensor assembly connector

Step 3 : Remove the waste liquid box assy from the stand.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




139
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 4 : Remove the screws fixing the waste liquid sensor assembly.



Step 5 : Reinstall all parts in the opposite order of the removal procedure.


Notes :

When installing the waste liquid BOX sensor assembly, pay attention to following
points :
Adjust the waste liquid BOX sensor assembly before installing the waste
liquid bottle cover.
Position and install it so that "Sensor : Waste liquid tank" is properly
switched in "Sensor Menu".




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




140
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




141
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
5.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the self-diagnosis function.
The self-diagnosis function adjusts the printing accuracy. It is used in the manufacturing process,
adjustment and maintenance.
The self-diagnosis function is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.


Notes :

Refer to Part names and functions ".



5.2. PREPARATION
Before you can use the self-diagnosis function, you should make the machine ready and display the self-
diagnosis menu.

5.2.1. Preparations on Machine
Before starting up the self-diagnosis function, perform following preparations:

(1) Setting printing media
Set a roll media for adjustment.


Notes :

Make sure to use coated paper for the adjustment purpose.


(2) Connecting power cable
Connect the power cable to the machine's inlet assembly and insert the power plug into an outlet.


Notes :

Do not connect three or more power plugs to one outlet.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




142
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.2.2. Starting Up
To use the self-diagnosis function, you should first display the self-diagnosis menu on the operation panel.
The self-diagnosis menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and self-diagnosis display
mode. To call up the self-diagnosis menu, follow the steps below.

Step 1 : If the system is in the operation mode or the self-diagnosis menu mode, press the [POWER] key
to power off the unit.
The power is turned off.

Step 2 : Press and hold the [F2] key, [F4] key, and [MENU ] key simultaneously. While holding down
these keys, press the [POWER] key.
The system will enter the self-diagnosis mode and display the self-diagnosis menu.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




143
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.3. OPERATIONS IN SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
This section explains how to operate in the self-diagnosis mode and provides the list of available diagnosis
items.

5.3.1. Operating Self-Diagnosis Mode
Follow the operation flow shown below to operate the self-diagnosis mode.
For more detailed operation steps, refer to the flow chart of the applicable diagnosis item.

Step 1 : Make sure the printer is in the diagnostic mode

Step 2 : Press the [MENU ] key or the [MENU ] key on the operation panel to change over in the
diagnosis menu.



Step 3 : Press the [F1] key, [F2] key, [F3] key or [F4] key to select the applicable diagnosis item.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




144
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 4 : Press the [F2] key or the [F4] key on the operation panel to modify the set value.



Step 5 : To save the modified value, press the [ENTER] key on the operation panel.
The modified set value is stored and a next item is displayed.




Notes :

If you press the [CANCEL] key instead of the [ENTER] key, the modification will not
be stored.



Notes :

Modifications will be stored definitely when the machines memory has been
powered off once. If the machine is not powered off properly, all changes made will
be ignored !

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




145
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 6 : To quit the diagnosis menu, press the [CANCEL] key on the operation panel.
The system returns to an upper hierarchy of the diagnosis menu.



Step 7 : To exit the self-diagnosis menu, press the [POWER] key.


5.3.2. Diagnosis Items in Self-Diagnosis Menu
The Self-Diagnosis menu includes following diagnosis items.

Initialization item Description Reference
Inspection Menu Performs various inspections on the circuit boards,
sensors, and fans.
Refer to Inspection Menu
Adjustment Menu Performs various adjustments for the printer mechanism. Refer to Adjustment Menu
Purge Menu Performs mode-specified purge. Refer to Purge Menu
Sample Printing
Menu
Performs sample printing necessary for adjustment. Sample Printing Menu
Parameter Menu Configures various adjustment parameters. Refer to Parameter Menu
Endurance
Running Menu
Performs endurance running of the printer mechanism. Refer to Endurance
Running Menu
Head Lock Menu Performs lock and release of the print head. Refer to Head Lock Menu

* Check *
F1 Test Adjustment F2
F3 Cleaning Print F4
(1/3)

* Check *
F1 Parameter Life F2
F3 Head lock Heat Syst F4
(2/3)

* Check *
F1 Sol Prepare SMS F2

(3/3)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




146
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.4. TEST / INSPECTION MENU
In the Inspection menu, you can perform various inspections on the circuit boards, sensors and fans.
The Inspection menu includes the following diagnosis items.

Initialization item Description Refer to
RamCapacity This menu displays the memory size.

Ram Capacity Menu
Ver Displays the versions of the firmware and mainboard
assembly.
Firmware version
Backup parameter version
Setting of dip switches
Revision of mainboard assembly

Version Menu
Panel Used to check the functions of the operation panel keys,
LCD, and LED.

Operation Panel Menu
Sensor This menu displays the sensor status in the operation
panel.
CR_HP sensor
Cover sensor
Lever sensor
P_EDGE sensor
P_REAR sensor
HD_SLIDE sensor
Thermistor sensor
Ink ID sensor
Ink NOT sensor
Ink END sensor

Sensor Menu
Encoder Displays the detected values from the following encoders.
CR (Carriage)
PF (Media feed)

Encoder Menu
Fan This menu is used to check if the fan operates normally by
turning ON and OFF the fan.

Fan Menu
Elec. Used to check the following records.
Maintenance history
Serious error history

History Menu
Head Signal This menu is used to check the head-driving signal. Head Signal Menu


* Test *
F1 RamCapacity Version F2
F3 Panel Sensor F4
(1/2)

* Test *
F1 Encoder Fan F2
F3 Elec. Head Signal F4
(2/2)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




147
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.4.1. RAM Capacity Menu
This menu displays the memory size.

* RamCapacity *
RamCapacity 256 MB




Notes :

The Memory Size menu displays the size of the memory installed on the mainboard
(128 MB or 256 MB).


5.4.2. Version Menu
This menu displays following contents about the firmware and mainboard assembly.
Firmware version
Backup parameter version
Setting of dip switches of mainboard assembly
Revision of mainboard assembly


Notes :

The details of the dipswitch setting of mainboard assembly are as follows.
Switch 1: OFF
Switch 2: OFF


* Ver *
Firm Sp0.99h,mA
Parameter 1.00
(1/2)

* Ver *
DipSW 0x03
Board Rev 10
(2/2)


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




148
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.4.3. Operation Panel Menu
This menu is used to check the functions of the operation panel keys, LCD, and LEDs.

(1) Operation panel key check
When you press a key on the operation panel, the name of the key is displayed on the LCD. To exit the
operation panel key check, press the [CANCEL] key twice.

(2) LCD check
The entire LCD screen is filled in black. You can check for any missing dots.

(3) LED check
The following LEDs light up in order. The LCD displays the name of the LED that is currently illuminated.
Power lamp
Error lamp
Data lamp
Media set lamp
Heater lamp
Roll media lamp
Sheet/Cut paper

* Panel *
F1 Key LCD F2
F3 LED


* Panel *
Key ??????








* Panel *
LED Origin



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




149
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.4.4. Sensor Menu
This menu displays the sensor status in the operation panel.
If the displayed sensor status does not match the actual machine status, replace or adjust the relevant
sensor referring to "Table Inspection Items in Sensor Menu".

N Sensor name Status in display Refer to
CR_HP sensor ON/OFF Replacing the transmission photosensor
Waste fluid sensor ON/OFF Replacing the waste liquid BOX sensor assembly
Wiper sensor On/Off
Cap sensor On/Off
Cover sensor Open/Close Replace the cover R sensor assembly and the
cover L sensor assembly
Ink cover sensor Open/Close Removing the I/H cover
Lever Up ON/OFF Replacing the transmission photosensor
Lever Down ON/OFF Replacing the transmission photosensor
Foot lever SW sensor ON/OFF
P_EDDE sensor 0 to FF (0 to 255) Replacing the P_EDGE sensor assembly
P_REAR-R sensor ON/OFF Replacing the P_REAR_R sensor assembly and
P_REAR_L sensor assembly
P_REAR-L sensor ON/OFF Replacing the P_REAR_R sensor assembly and
P_REAR_L sensor assembly
HD_SLIDE sensor ON/OFF Replacing the SLIDE motor assembly, HD_SLIDE
sensor assembly and slide motor installation board
Head thermister **C
Ink ID sensor Pig, Dye, WASH Replacing the Cartridge Area
Ink NOT sensor 12345678 Replacing the Cartridge Area
Ink END sensor 12345678 Replacing the Cartridge Area


Notes :

The ink ID sensor indicates the type of ink cartridge installed with the following ID.
W(ASH): Cleaning fluid
S : Spitfire Mild Solvent

The ink NOT sensor indicates the number where a cartridge is missing.

For the ink end sensor, the colour of the ink that has run out is displayed.


* Sensor *
CR Origin Off CR_HP sensor
Waste Bin On Waste fluid sensor
(1/9)

* Sensor *
Wiper On Wiper sensor
Cap Off Cap sensor
(2/9)

* Sensor *
Cover Open Cover sensor
InkCover Open Ink cover sensor
(3/9)
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




150
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


* Sensor *
LeverUp On Lever up sensor
LeverDown On Lever down sensor
(4/9)


* Sensor *
FootLever On Foot lever SW sensor
PaperEdgeAD 04e P_EDGE sensor
(5/9)

* Sensor *
PaperRear R Off P_REAR_R sensor
PaperRear L Off P_REAR_L sensor
(6/9)

* Sensor *
Headslide On HD_SLIDE sensor
Temp 25C Head thermistor
(7/9)

* Sensor *
Ink ID 12 34 5678 Ink ID Sensors
SSwwSSSS
(8/9)

* Sensor *
Ink Not Ink NOT sensor
Ink End Ink END sensor
(9/9)

5.4.5. Encoder Menu
This menu displays the detected values from the following encoders.
CR_ENC (Carriage)
PF_ENC (Media feed)


Notes :

For the encoder-detected values, the encoder pulse numbers are displayed in
hexadecimal number.


* Encoder *
CR 0000 CR_ENC
PF 0000 PF_ENC



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




151
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.4.6. Fan Menu

This menu is used to check if the fan operates normally by turning it ON and OFF the fan.
As soon as you select this menu, the fan will be activated.
When you press the [CANCEL] key, the fan is off and the operation panel displays "Inspection: Fan".

* Fan *
[Cancel] End



5.4.7. History Menu

This menu is used to check the maintenance history and serious error history.

* Elec. *
F1 Maintenance Error F2



(1) Maintenance history
Maintenance history for the following parts is displayed.
Waste liquid tank capacity (#)
Number of cuts (#)
Number of wipes of the cleaner head (#)
Number of rubs of the cleaner head (#)
Number of drives of the CR motor (#)
Number of drives of the PF motor (#)
Number of printing copies (#)
Number of cleanings (#)
Discharge amount of head ink 1 (A, B nozzles), M dot
Discharge amount of head ink 2 (A, B nozzles), M dot
Discharge amount of head ink 3 (A, B nozzles), M dot
Discharge amount of head ink 4 (A, B nozzles), M dot
Cutter solenoid down times (#)


Notes :

For the CR motor drive count, 1 pass becomes 1 count.

For the PF motor drive count, 10 meters travel becomes 1 count.


* Maintenance *
WasteInk 00000000 Waste liquid tank capacity
Cut 00000000 Number of cuts
(1/10)

* Maintenance *
Wiper 00000000 Number of wipes of the cleaner head
Rubbing 00000000 Number of rubs of the cleaner head
(2/10)

* Maintenance *
CR Motor 00000000 Number of drives of the CR motor
PF Motor 00000000 Number of drives of the PF motor
(3/10)
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




152
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

* Maintenance *
PrintingNumber 00000000 Number of printing copies
Cleaning 00000000 Number of cleanings
(4/10)

* Maintenance *
Fire 1-A 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 1-A nozzle ink
Fire 1-B 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 1-B nozzle ink
(5/10)

* Maintenance *
Fire 2-A 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 2-A nozzle ink
Fire 2-B 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 2-A nozzle ink
(6/10)

* Maintenance *
Fire 3-A 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 3-A nozzle ink
Fire 3-B 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 3-B nozzle ink
(7/10)

* Maintenance *
Fire 4-A 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 4-A nozzle ink
Fire 4-B 00000000Mdot Discharge amount of head 4-A nozzle ink
(8/10)

* Maintenance *
Pump A 24926 Number of cycles of Pump A
Pump B 24980 Number of cycles of Pump B
(9/10)

* Maintenance *
Cut Sole. 00000000 Cutter solenoid down time

(10/10)

(2) Serious error history

This menu displays the serious errors that have occurred so far.


Notes :

A serious error history does not include any CPU errors.
A serious error history can contain up to 32 error events.


* Error *
Error0 Y current
Error1 X motor
(1/16)

* Error *
Error2 X motor
Error3 X motor
(2/16)

* Error *
Error30 Y Current
Error31 No Error
(16/16)
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




153
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.4.8. Head Signal Menu

This menu is used to check the head-driving signal.

* Head Signal *
F1 Flush Mode1 F2
F3 Mode2 Mode3 F4
(1/2)

* Head Signal *
F1 Mode5 Mode7 F2

(2/2)

Select :

* Head Signal *




ENTER :

* Flush *
Drive




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




154
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5. ADJUSTMENT MENU
In this menu, you can align the printing position and correct the media feed operation.
The Adjustment menu includes following diagnosis menus :

Initialization item Description Refer to
Skew check In this menu, you can perform media feed and check
the degree of skew in the media feed operation by
means of the sensors.
Skew Check Menu
Head rank input Inputs the characteristic value of the installed print
head. Ink is replenished after this input.
Head rank input menu
Head nozzle check Prints out a printing to check the ink discharge
performance of the head nozzles.
Head Nozzle Check Menu
Head angle check Prints out a print to check for printer head slant.
Mechanical adjustment should be performed as
necessary.
Head Slant Check Menu
Repeatability
adjustment
Prints out a print to align the two-way printing
position.
Repeatability Adjustment
Menu
CW adjustment Prints out a print to adjust any gaps between the
heads.
CW Adjustment Menu
Band feed correction Prints out a print to correct the media feed amount
for each pass.
Band Feed Correction
Menu (X Length)
Top & bottom
adjustment
Sets the top and bottom margins. Top & bottom adjustment
menu
P_REAR sensor
position adjustment
Adjusts the position of the P_REAR sensor using
sheet media.
P_REAR sensor position
adjustment menu
Test Print Prints out a nozzle check pattern and the adjustment
variables.
Test print menu
Head Wash Cleans the tubes and heads using cleaning fluid. Head wash menu
Software counter
initialization
Clears various software counters. Software Counter
Initialization Menu
Feed amount check Used to check the media feed amount for one band. Feed Pitch Check Menu
Fill pattern A fill printing pattern is printed by both ends of the
head.
Fill printing menu

* Adj *
F1 CheckSkew Input Rank F2
F3 ChkNozzle HeadSlant F4
(1/4)

* Adj *
F1 Bi-D Uni-D F2
F3 Feed Adj. Top&Bottom F4
(2/4)

* Adj *
F1 R. Sns. Pos. TestPrint F2
F3 CleanHead CountClear F4
(3/4)

* Adj *
F1 SendPitch
F3 FillPattern
(4/4)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




155
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.1. Skew Check Menu
In this menu, you can perform media feed and check the degree of skew in the media feed operation by
means of the sensors.
When you select this item from the Adjustment menu, the machine feeds the length specified by the
operation panel and checks for media feed skew by comparing the media edge positions before and after the
media feed detected by the sensors.


Notes :

Before performing skew check, ensure that the media is set correctly.
Since the reference position where media has been set is determined the first time the
media left edge is detected, errors may result as follows if the media is not setup
correctly.

Media errors occur during skew check and the operation stops.
"Undefined Media" occurs frequently during media initialization when the power is
turned on or media is cut.


* Check Skew *
0.1 m 10.0 m +
1.0 m - Set per 0.1 m


ENTER

* Check Skew *
Set Paper When media is not set



Media set

* Check Skew *
Paper Initial



Finishing media initialization

* Check Skew *
Exc. Skew



Finishing media edge detection normally

* Check Skew *
SkewResult + 0.010 mm



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




156
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.2. Head rank input menu
Inputs the head rank.
The head rank is used to determine the operation voltage of the head and compensate the temperature.
Input head rank following the steps below.

(1) Selecting input method
When inputting head rank, select one of the following methods.
Input using the QR code
Input from the operation panel

(2) When input using the QR code has been selected
Make sure that the operation panel displays "Input HEAD1 QR code".
Input the QR code from the QR code reader.

* QRcode * * QRcode *
Input Head1 QRcode Head ID input



ENTER Incorrectly entered : Error
Correctly entered : Initial charge menu Press ENTER to re-enter

(3) When input from the operation panel is selected
Input the parameters of the upper and lower sections of the head rank using the operation panel keys.

* Panel * * QRcode *
ID1 - H + Head ID input
7BZ3E3CVXUWVWQQ 21 -


ENTER Incorrectly entered : Error
Press ENTER to re-enter
* Panel *
ID1 L +
00Y012VTTR 40UWJB -


ENTER
Correctly entered : Initial charge menu

(4) Initial ink charge menu
When the input head rank has been confirmed, initial ink charge is performed.

* Charge *
Ink charge [enter] [CANCEL] Initial charge is not executed.
Voltage input value is updated.


ENTER

* Charge *
[1] No Catridge



Set cartridge

* Charge *
Ink Charge




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




157
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.3 Head Nozzle Check Menu
In this menu, you can check if the head nozzles, after refilling, can discharge ink correctly by printing a
sample print.
To print out head nozzle check patterns, follow the steps below. The following is the description of the
printing method.

Step 1 : Set media as necessary.


Notes :

Refer to the Users Guide.

Pressing the [ENTER] key in the Diagnosis menu in self-diagnostic mode moves the
lever up and down.


Step 2 : After media has been set, the machine prints out head nozzle check patterns in the following
modes. The following is the description of the printing method.
1 pass Single way

Step 3 : Check the printed head nozzle check patterns for the following points. Check points are as
follows.
Ink nozzle discharge amount (omission, discontinuity, meandering)
Satellite
T fence
Nozzle alignment in vertical direction
Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction

Nozzle check: Prints out patterns in the order of 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4A, 4B.



Nozzle alignment in vertical direction: Prints out patterns in the order of 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B,
4A, 4B.



Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction (CW): Prints out patterns in the order of 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B,
3A, 3B, 4A, 4B.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




158
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Nozzle alignment in horizontal direction (CCW): Prints out patterns in the order of 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B,
3A, 3B, 4A, 4B.



Step 4 : If any abnormal conditions are found in the ink discharge status of the head nozzles, perform ink
purge on the relevant heads.

Step 5 : After the ink purge, the system returns to the purge selection menu.

* ChkNozzle *
Set Paper If media is not set



Media set

* ChkNozzle *
Paper Initial



End Media initialization

* ChkNozzle *
F1 End Output Pattern F2

(1/2)

* ChkNozzle *
F1 Normal Powerful F2
F3 Little
(2/2)

If Normal cleaning is selected

* Normal *
Cleaning



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




159
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.4. Head Slant Check Menu
This menu prints out a sample printing to check for head slant.

Item Description
Slant All head slant check.
Front and back Front and back position and slant of each head relative to the reference head check.
All Confirmation of the forward and rear positions for all nozzle rows and all heads.
end Check complete.

5.5.4.1Head slant adjustment

Step 1 : Start the self-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function


Step 2 : Select "Adj:HeadSlant".

Step 3 : Print "Slant" pattern.
If dotted lines on pattern CW and CCW are not a straight line, which you can check with a
magnifying glass (enlargement of at least 10), please go to step 4.


Notes :

When the printing pattern is printed, you will only see lines, and no notifications of ink
channels. The head sequence shown below.

4 head model: 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4A, 4B


Step 4 : Loosen the screw (with one turn) fixing the head stationary plate.









No. Part
1 Screw (M2.5x5) fixing the head stationary plate
2 Angle adjustment screw
3 Front and back adjustment screw
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




160
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 5 : Make adjustments until amount of CW and CCW offset are identical.


Notes :

In theory, the alignment of CW and CCW should be identical. But in practice, it is
almost impossible to become a perfect alignment. When there is a slight difference
between CW and CCW, be sure the heads are well seated.

In case you only print uni directional, adjust the CW till it is aligned perfectly.
In case you print bi-directional, and CW and CCW cannot be aligned more perfectly.
Divide the fault equally.

When printing the pattern, the head identifications 1A, 1B etc, are not printed.
Analyse the pattern as shown below. Be sure to have five lines for each color.




How to adjust What to become




No. Part
1 Angle adjustment screw


Step 6 : Tighten the screw fixing the head stationary plate.

Repeat step 1 to 6 until the adjustment is correct for all heads.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




161
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.4.2. Front and back

To perform a Head Front/Back Adjustment, please follow the steps mentioned below.

Step 1 : In diagnostic mode, go to [Adjust : Head Slant].


Step 2 : Press the [F2] key for F&B (front and back) adjustment.


* HeadSlant *
F1 Slant F&B F2
F3 Check End F4


Step 3 : Print out [Front/Back] pattern. First pattern A with 1A as reference is printed, then pattern B with
4B as reference and finally A+B.





A+B



B

4B is the
reference
head





A

1A is the
reference
head
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




162
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Notes :

To help you identify the print heads on the test pattern please refer to the diagram
below.


Know you see, 1A is Black, 1B is Yellow, etc (in our color combination).



Step 4 : Check if all nozzles are in 1 row by using a magnifying glass with an enlargement of at least 10.
If not, please proceed to step 5.

Step 5 : Loosen the screw with 1 turn, which secures the Head Fixing Plate.



No. Part
1 Head Fixing plate securing screw
2 Front/Back Adjustment Screw

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




163
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 6 : When the nozzles are not in one row, adjust the head front/back position by moving the Head
Front/Back Adjustment Screw the manner shown below. First adjust nozzle row A (1A, 2A, 3A,
4A). When adjusted perfectly, nozzle row B should automatically be adjusted. But in practice this
isnt always a fact. When your determine a small misalignment after adjusting A well, readjust
again until all nozzles of row A and B are perfectly aligned.




NOTE :

We only give an example for one colour combination. Please refer to Operation
Procedure Labels in the Maintenance Manual where you can find the other possible
colour combinations.



Step 7 : Tighten the screw which secures the Head Fixing Plate.

Step 8 : Repeat step 1 to 7 until the adjustment is correct.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




164
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.5. Repeatability Adjustment (Bi-Directional)

To perform a Repeatability Adjustment, please follow the steps mentioned below.

Step 1 : Start the self-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function".


Step 2 : Select "Adj:Bi-D".

Step 3 : Print a repeatability pattern.

Step 4 : The odd rows (with each 5 dots) are the references. So the even rows should be adjusted (use a
magnifying with an enlargement of at least 10)
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the right, you have to increase (+) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 30 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -10 for example
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the left, you have to decrease (-) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 10 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -30 for example



4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A


Step 5 : Adjust reciprocation per head height.

#1: Head height LOW
#2: Head height MIDDLE
#3: Head height HIGH


Notes :

In the event that all parts of unit do not line up due to part or assembly precision
error, make adjustments until everything in the area around center lines up in a
straight line.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




165
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


5.5.6. CW adjustments (Uni-Directional)

To perform CW adjustments, please follow the steps mentioned below.

Step 1 : Start the self-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function".


Step 2 : Select "Adj:Uni-D".

Step 3 : Print a CW adjustment pattern.

Step 4 : The odd rows (alternately 1A and 1B) are the references. So the even rows (2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4 A
and 4B) should be adjusted (use a magnifying with an enlargement of at least 10)
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the right, you have to increase (+) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 30 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -10 for example
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the left, you have to decrease (-) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 10 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -30 for example

1B 1A 1B 1A 1B 1A



4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A



Notes :

In the event that all parts of unit do not line up due to part or assembly precision
error, make adjustments until everything in the area around center lines up in a
straight line.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




166
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.7. Band Feed Correction Menu (X Length)

In this menu, you can correct the media feed distance.
To correct the media feed distance, you must first print out check patterns and measure the distance
between lines drawn in the media feed direction. Then you enter the measured value through this menu.
The system uses this entered value to determine the PF encoder resolution parameter in the firmware.

To perform an X-length Adjustment, please follow the steps mentioned below.

Step 1 : Go to Feed Adjustment.

Step 2 : Set the parameter value to 900 mm.

Step 3 : Print out the Feed Adjustment pattern.

Step 4 : Measure the printed Band Feed Correction pattern.



Step 5 : Enter the measured value as the Media Feed Distance parameter.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




167
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

* Feed Adj. *
X Length 300 1000 +
500 mm -


ENTER

CANCEL * Feed Adj. *
Enter Print Start



ENTER

* Feed Adj. *
Set paper A media is not set



Media setting

* Feed Adj. *
Paper Initial



Finish media initialization

* Feed Adj. *
Adjustment Print Display during adjustment printing



Finish printing

* Feed Adj. *
X Length 300 1010 +
500.0 mm -


ENTER

* Feed Adj. *
Enter Print Start




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




168
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.8. Top & bottom adjustment menu
Sets printing margins.
Make adjustments following the steps below.

Step 1 : Set media as necessary.

Step 2 : After the media has been set, pattern printing with band feed compensation and media cutting
are performed. The following is the description of the printing method.
Black, one path, one-way

Step 3 : Measure the following adjustment items for the results of the printing of the top & bottom
adjustment pattern.
Measurements are carried out at the center of the media. The adjustment items are as follows.
Top distance
Bottom distance
Side margin








1: Top distance
2: Bottom distance
3: Side margin
4: Media feed direction

Step 4 : Input each measurement as a parameter.

* Top&Bottom *
Set Paper If media is not set



Set media

* Top&Bottom *
Paper Initial



End Media Initialization

* Top&Bottom *
Adjustment Print Display during adjustment printing



* Top&Bottom *
Top Length 0 40.0 +
5.0 mm -


* Top&Bottom *
Top Length 0 40.0 +
5.0 mm -


* Top&Bottom *
Side 0 20.0 +
5.0 mm -

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




169
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.9. P_REAR sensor position adjustment menu
Adjust the P_REAR sensor position in order to accurately detect the length of the cut media.
During this adjustment, the P_REAR sensor position can be adjusted inside the firmware by referring to the
nozzle, in order to obtain a maximum printable area starting from the ends of the media.
Make adjustments following the steps below.

Step 1 : Set media as necessary.


Notes :

Use cutting media for adjusting the P_REAR sensor. Set A3 cutting media in
portrait orientation.

P_REAR sensor position adjustment is a process necessary during manufacturing.
This does not need to be done when band feed is compensated.


Step 2 : After the media has been set, a pattern printing with the P_REAR sensor position adjustment is
performed.
The following is the description of the printing method.
Draws a horizontal line (black 1 dot line) 17 mm away from the media end.



Step 3 : Measure the distance from the media end to the line just drawn.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




170
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 4 : Input the measurement as the parameter of the P_REAR sensor position.

* Rear Sensor *
Set Cutting Paper



Set media

* Rear Sensor *
Paper Initial If media is not set



End media initialization

* Rear Sensor *
Paper Width 297.0 mm Check media width



ENTER

* Rear Sensor *
Rear Sensor 7.0 27.0 +
17.0 mm -



5.5.10. Test print menu
In this menu, you can print out adjustment patterns for checking various adjustment items.
Make adjustments following the steps below.

Step 1 : Set media as necessary.

Step 2 : After media has been set, the machine prints out the following test Printings.
Nozzle check: Head nozzle check pattern
Adjustment variables: Set values of various adjustment variables

Step 3 : Perform selected test print.

*Print*
NOZZLE CheckAdj.Vari.






Spitfire Maintenance Manual




171
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.11. Head wash menu
In this menu, ink is drained and the head is cleaned at the completion of the manufacturing process and
before replacing the print head.
Execute a cleaning following the steps below.

Step 1 : Initialize the waste ink history.
Refer to Parameter Initialization Menu

Step 2 : Discharge the waste fluid from the waste fluid bottle.

Step 3 : Press the [ENTER] key in the operation panel to confirm the head cleaning menu.

Step 4 : Remove all ink cartridges.

Step 5 : Press the [ENTER] key in the operation panel to drain the ink.

Step 6 : After the ink has been drained, install the head cleaning fixture.

Step 7 : Press the [ENTER] key in the operation panel to supply the cleaning fluid.

Step 8 : After the cleaning fluid has been supplied, remove the head cleaning fixture.

Step 9 : Drain the cleaning fluid by pressing the [ENTER] key in the operation panel.

Step 10 : Initialize the waste ink history.


Notes :

When performing the ink cleaning, always initialize the waste ink history then start a
head cleaning. Otherwise, during cleaning, the waste ink tank becomes full and
cleaning is interrupted.

After the head cleaning, always initialize the waste ink history. Otherwise, during
filling, the waste ink tank becomes full, and filling is interrupted.

Before ink filling, discharge the cleaning fluid, and wait for at least 30 minutes.
Otherwise, the printing may be unstable.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




172
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


* Clean Head *
Remove cartridge



Eject all cartridge and press the [ENTER] key to drain ink

* Clean Head *
Ink Discharge



End Ink draining

* Clean Head *
Set Cleaning jig



Set the head cleaning jig and press the [ENTER] key to charge
the cleaning liquid.

* Clean Head *
Head Cleaning



Charge cleaning liquid

* Clean Head *
Remove cleaning jig



Remove the head cleaning jig and press the [ENTER] key to
drain the cleaning liquid.

* Clean Head *
Head Cleaning





Spitfire Maintenance Manual




173
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.12. Software Counter Initialization Menu
This menu initializes the software counters such as the ink amount counter.


Notes :

Before delivery, always initialize the software counters.


The software counters that can be initialized through this menu are as follows.

Counter Initial value
Ink amount counter 0
Ink consumption counter 1 0
Ink consumption counter 2 0
Ink consumption counter 3 0
Ink consumption counter 4 0
Ink consumption counter 5 0
Ink consumption counter 6 0
Ink consumption counter 7 0
Ink consumption counter 8 0
Cumulative printout timer 0
Waste ink counter 0
Ink ID mask Reset
Initial ink charge flag Set

Pressing the [ENTER] key in the operation panel performs the software counter initialization. Pressing the
[CANCEL] key cancels the initialization.

* CountClear *
Counter reset ?



ENTER

* CountClear *
Wait little time



End initialization

* CountClear *
R. Sns. Pos. Testprint
CleanHead CountClear
(3/4)


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




174
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.5.13. Feed Pitch Check Menu
In this menu, you can check the media feed amount for one band by reviewing a sample printing. There is
no adjustment item.
To check the feed pitch, follow the steps below.

Step 1 : Set media as necessary.

Step 2 : Select "Adj:SendPitch".

Step 3 : Select "Pattern 1" or "Pattern 2" to print feed pitch check patterns.
"Pattern 1": Drawn with 1 inch (2.54 cm) intervals
"Pattern 2": Draw a repetitive pattern with 1/4 inch (0.635 cm) intervals every 4 lines and
0.63 cm intervals between each of the 4 lines.

Step 4 : Confirm that it is drawn at 1 inch intervals as shown in the following drawing.



A = Media feed direction

5.5.14. Fill printing menu
A fill printing pattern is printed by both ends of the head.



A: Media feed direction
B: 100% print

65-inch specifications are pattern printed in the sequence 1A&4B, 1A&4B, 1A&4B, while 90-inch
specifications are printed in the sequence 1A&8B, 1A&4B, 5A&8B.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




175
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.6. PURGE MENU
In this menu, you can purge ink from the printer heads.
The Purge menu includes the following diagnosis items.

Diagnosis item Description
Normal Performs normal purge.
Powerful Performs powerful purge.
Little Performs minimum purge.
Initial ink charge Performs initial ink charge.

* Cleaning *
F1 Normal Powerfull F2
F3 Little Ink charge F4


Select item (Normal cleaning)

* Normal *
Cleaning





Spitfire Maintenance Manual




176
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.7. SAMPLE PRINTING MENU
This menu prints out a sample printing.
The Sample printing menu includes the following items.

Diagnosis item Description
Nozzle Check Prints the head nozzle check pattern.
Adjustment variables Prints out the set values of various adjustment items.


Notes :

When serial numbers are not input to this product, the serial numbers become blank
spaces.


* Print *
F1 Nozzle Adj. Variable F2



Select item (Nozzle check)

* Check Nozzle *
Adjustment Print





Spitfire Maintenance Manual




177
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.8. PARAMETER MENU
In this menu, you can modify the set values of various adjustment items (adjustment parameter).
The Parameter menu includes the following items.

Initialization item Description Refer to
Initialize. Initializes the adjustment parameters. Parameter Initialization
Menu
Update Updates the adjustment parameters. Parameter Update Menu

* Parameter *
F1 Initialize Update F2


5.8.1. Parameter Initialization Menu
This menu initializes the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are as
follows.
Capping position
Media feed distance
Serial number
Head history
Wiper history
Waste ink history
CR motor history
PF motor history
Pumps
Waste tank
Initialization of all items

* Initialize *
F1 P. FeedLen serialNo. F2
F3 Head Wiper F4
(1/3)

*Initialize*
F1 CR Motor PF Motor F2
F3 Pump A Pump B F4
(2/3)

*Initialize*
F1 WasteInk All F2

(3/3)

Select item (P. FeedLen.)

* P. FeedLen. *
Initialize OK ?



ENTER

* P. FeedLen. *
Initialize Parameter


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




178
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.8.2. Parameter Update Menu
This menu updates the adjustment parameters. The parameters that can be updated through this menu are
as follows.

Head voltage
Printing position alignment
CW adjustment
Media feed distance
Mechanical parameter
Ink parameter
Ink ID mask
Serial number


Notes :

If you update any parameter in the Parameter Update menu, always turn the power
OFF after quitting the menu. The updated parameters will not be stored in the flash
memory unless the system power is turned OFF.


* Update *
F1 HeadRank PrintPos. F2
F3 CW Adj. P. FeedLen. F4
(1/2)

* Update *
F1 Mechparm Inparm F2
F3 Ink ID mask serialNo. F4
(2/2)


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




179
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


(1) Head ID
In this menu, you can enter a head ID. The head ID is used to determine the printer head-driving voltage
and perform temperature correction.
After a head ID has been entered, the system shifts to the Ink Charge menu.

* HeadRank * * HeadRank *
ID1 H + Head ID input
1BZ3E3ECVXUWWQQ -


ENTER Incorrectly entered : Error
Press ENTER to re-enter
* HeadRank *
ID1 - L +
00Y0IZVTTR 40UWJB -


ENTER

* HeadRank *
Update Parameter



ENTER

* HeadRank *
Updating Parameter





* HeadRank * CANCEL
Ink charge [ENTER] Initial charge is not performed
Rank input value is updated


ENTER

* Charge *
[1] No Cartridge





* Charge *
Ink Charge




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




180
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Printing position alignment
This updates the printing position alignment parameters.

* PrintPos Adj.*
# 1 Head 1A +
-28 -


* PrintPos Adj. *
#1 Head 1B +
-28 -





If the parameter is updated

* PrintPos Adj. * * PrintPos Adj. *
#1 Head 4B + ENTER Update Parameter ?
-48 -


ENTER

* PrintPos Adj. *
Updating parameter




(3) CW
This updates the CW adjustment parameters.

* CW Adj. *
Gap 1 - 2 -400 400 +
0 -


* CW Adj. *
Gap 1 - 3 -400 400 +
0 -





If the parameter is updated

* CW Adj. * * CW Adj. *
Gap 1 - 4 -400 400 + ENTER Update Parameter ?
0 -


ENTER

* CW Adj. *
Updating Parameter



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




181
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


(4) Media feed distance
This updates the media feed distance parameters.

* PaperFeedLen. *
X Length 290 1010 +
500.0 mm -


ENTER

* PaperFeedLen. *
Update Parameter ?



ENTER

* Update *
Updating Parameter




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




182
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(5) Mechanical parameter
Update the mechanical position parameters. The setup items are as follows.

Top distance
Bottom distance
Side margin
P_REAR sensor position

* Mechparm *
Top Length 0 40.0 +
5.0 mm -


* Mechparm *
Bottom 0 40.0 +
5.0 mm -


* Mechparm *
Side 0 20.0 +
5.0 mm -


* Mechparm *
Rear Sensor 0 27.0 +
17.0 mm -


ENTER

* Mechparm *
Update Parameter



ENTER

* Mechparm *
Updating Parameter




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




183
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(6) Ink parameter
This updates the ink parameter. The setup items are as follows.
Set: Ink not filled
Reset: Ink filled


Notes :

When "set" has been selected on the ink parameter update menu, the product
implements initial filling operations at the next start up.


* InkParameter *
Init. Fill Flag +
Set -


ENTER

* InkParameter *
Update Parameter ? If the parameter is changed



ENTER

* InkParameter *
Updating Parameter



(7) Ink ID mask
Update the ink ID mask parameters. The setup items are as follows.

Set: Ink ID is always fixed. When a mask has been set, any cartridge inserted will be
handled as dye 4 colours fixed.
Reset: Resets the ink ID mask. Cartridge recognition becomes available via smart chip.

* Ink ID mask *
Ink ID mask +
Set -


ENTER

* Ink ID mask *
Update Parameter If parameter is updated



ENTER

* Ink ID mask *
Updating Parameter




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




184
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

When loading Spitfire ink cassettes with smart-chip, it is possible that you get the message not original ink.
If this is the case, please proceed as follow :

Step 1 : Remove the ink cassette.

Step 2 : Take a closer look at the smart-chip.

Step 3 : There are some lines on the smart-chip made by the sensors in the cartridge box.


Nr. Part
1 Cassette
2 Smart-chip
3 Lines made by the sensors in the cartridge box

Step 4 : There are three possibilities.

Situation 1: The lines are in the middle

This is the perfect situation; the one which should be obtained.



Situation 2: The lines are lying on the black lines

This is the situation when the printer will display the message. No original ink. The sensors do
not detect the smart chip because the sensors do not touch the copper. This problem can be
solved easily. Move the smart-chip a few millimetres above, so that the sensor lines lie in the
middle of the black lines as in situation 1.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual






185
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Situation 3: The lines are lying a just above the black line

The sensor will sometimes give contact with the smart-ship, but not always.
So it is possible that the printer, even during printing, displays the message No original ink.
Again, move the smart-chip a few millimetres above, so that the sensor lines lie in the middle of
the black lines as in situation 1.



Step 5 : Reposition the smart-chip in case of situation 2 or 3 in function of the cartridge box and its
tolerance. Be sure to obtain the first situation, where the lines lie in between the black lines.




Caution:

All dimensions should be respected. There is only a little tolerance on the
dimensions 2.2 mm and 33.4 mm because of the tolerance on the cartridge box.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




186
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


(8) Serial number entry
This is for entering the serial number.

* SerialNo. *
+
DD6*000001 -


* SerialNo. *
+
DD6C*00001 -


* SerialNo. *
+
DD6C1*0001 -


* SerialNo. *
+
DD6C12*001 -


* SerialNo. *
+
DD6C123*01 -


* SerialNo. *
+
DD6C1234*1 -


* SerialNo. *
+
DD6C12345* -




Notes :

The third figure of a serial number differs with the machine size.
6: 65 inch
8: 90 inch


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




187
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9. ENDURANCE RUNNING MENU
In this menu, you can perform endurance running on the printer heads.
The Endurance Running menu includes the following items.

Initialization item Description Refer to
CR Motor Performs carriage stroke. CR Motor Endurance Menu
PF motor Drives the PF motor. PF Motor Endurance Menu
Razor Blade Cuts media. Cutter Endurance menu
Head up/down Changes over the head height repeatedly. Head Up/Down Endurance
Menu
Head lock Tests head lock operation.
Performs wiper up/down operation via the selecting
menu.
Head Lock Endurance
menu
Pump Drives the positive/negative pressure pump motor. Pump Endurance menu
Lever motor Drives the lever motor. Sequential Printing
Endurance Menu
Nozzle print Prints out a printing by printer heads repeatedly. Sequential Printing
Endurance Menu
General endurance Performs endurance running on the CR, PF and
head up/down concurrently.
General Endurance Menu
Confirmation Check the number of endurance running cycles. Endurance Running Check
Menu


* Life *
F1 CR motor PF motor F2
F3 Cutter Head U/D F4
(1/3)

* Life *
F1 Head Lock Pump F2
F3 Lever Motor Nozzle F4
(2/3)

* Life *
F1 Total Life Check F2

(3/3)


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




188
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.1. CR Motor Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the CR motor.
You can perform carriage stroke according to your desired setting. The available settings are shown below.

Setup item Description Parameters Remarks
Operation speed (CW,
CCW)
Sets carriage operation
speed (CW and CCW).
240, 300 Unit: cps
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of
endurance running
cycles
-1 to 10000


Notes :

If the number of endurance running cycles has been set to -1, the units continuously
repeat endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.

The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset
to 0.


* Speed CW *
Speed 240 / 300 + Speed (CW)
240 cps -


ENTER

* Speed CCW *
Speed 240 / 300 + Speed (CCW)
240 cps -


ENTER

* Aging Count *
Count -1 10000 + Number of endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* CR Motor *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



ENTER

* CR Motor *
End 50



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




189
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.2. PF Motor Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the PF motor.
You can drive the PF motor according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.

Setup item Description Parameters Remarks
Media feed amount Sets amount of media
feeds per endurance
operation.
0 to 100 Unit: mm
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of
endurance running
cycles
-1 to 10000


Notes :

The motor drive parameters are determined as follows depending on the media feed
amount.

Speed 54 cps
Acceleration 0.1 G
Deceleration 0.1 G

If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the units continuously repeat
endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.

The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset
to 0.


* FeedAmount *
0 100.0 mm + Media feed amount
0.1 mm -


ENTER

* LifeCount *
Count -1 10000 + Number of endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* PFmotor *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



ENTER

* PFmotor *
End 50



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




190
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.3. Cutter Endurance menu
This menu performs endurance running for the cutter.
You can perform the cutting operation according to the settings.


Caution :

Pay attention to the following points when performing the cutter endurance operation.
Install usable ink cartridges.
Make sure that media initialization is complete.
Performing the cutter endurance operation without ink cartridges could result in damage
to the product if the cutter fails outside the cutting range.


The available settings are shown below.

Setup item Description Parameters Remarks
Page size Sets amount of media feeds per
endurance operation.
30 to 3000 Unit: mm
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance
running cycles
-1 to 10000
Waiting time Set the waiting time after one
cycle of endurance running
40 Unit: second


Notes :

If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the units continuously repeat
endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.

The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset
to 0.

The waiting time is not modifiable.


* Page size *
30 3000 mm + Page size
30 mm -


ENTER

* Cutter *
Count -1 10000 + Count Endurance
50 -


ENTER

* Cutter *
Time Wait (sec) 40 Check Waiting time



ENTER
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




191
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



* Cutter *
Count 5 Perform endurance



ENTER

* Cutter *
End 50


5.9.4. Head Up/Down Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the head up/down operation.
You can perform the capping operation according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.

Setup item Description Parameters Remarks
Waiting time Set the waiting time after one
cycle of endurance running
10 Unit: second
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance
running cycles
-1 to 10000


Notes :

If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the units continuously repeat
endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.
The waiting time is not modifiable.


* LifeCount *
Count -1 10000 + Number of endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* Head U/D *
Time Wait (sec) 10 Check wait time



ENTER or CANCEL

* Head U/D *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



ENTER or CANCEL

* Head U/D *
End 50


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




192
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.5. Head Lock Endurance menu
Test endurance of head lock.
In the Head Lock Endurance menu, you can perform head lock operation according to the set items.


Notes :

Refer to "Head Up/Down Endurance Menu"
The wait time for head lock endurance is set to 10 seconds.



* Head lock *
Wiper U/D Yes/No + Wiper up and down
Yes -


ENTER

* LifeCount *
Count -1 10000 + Number of endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* Head Lock *
Time Wait (sec) 10 Check wait time



ENTER to perform endurance

* Head Lock *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



End

* Head Lock *
End 50




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




193
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.6. Pump Endurance menu
This menu performs endurance running for the pump.
In the Pump Endurance menu, you can perform the pump motor assembly endurance operation according to
the settings.
The available settings are shown below.

Setup item Description Parameters Remarks
Operation speed Sets the operation speed
of the pump motor
assembly.
High/Normal/Low
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of
endurance running
cycles
-1 to 10000


Notes :

If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the units continuously repeat
endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.

The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset
to 0.


* Aging pump *
F1 High Normal F2
F3 Low


Select speed (high)

* LifeCount *
Count -1 10000 + Number of endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* High *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



ENTER or CANCEL

* High *
End 50




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




194
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.7. Lever Motor Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the lever motor.
You can drive the lever motor according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown below.

Setup item Description Parameters Remarks
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of
endurance running
cycles
-1 to 10000


Notes :

If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the units continuously repeat
endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.

The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset
to 0.



* LifeCount *
Count -1 10000 + Number of endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* LeverMotor *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



ENTER or CANCEL

* LeverMotor *
End 50




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




195
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.8. Sequential Printing Endurance Menu
This menu performs endurance running for the printer heads.
You can operate the printer heads according to your desired settings. The available settings are shown
below.

Setup item Description Parameters
Printing mode Set printing mode. MODE 1, MODE 2, MODE 3,
MODE 5, MODE 6, MODE 7
Media Cut Sets whether to cut media each time one
printing is printed out or not.
Yes, No
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance running cycles -1 to 10000


Notes :

If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the units continuously repeat
endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.

The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset
to 0.


* Print Mode *
F1 MODE1 MODE2 F2
F3 MODE3 MODE5 F4
(1/2)

* Print Mode *
F1 MODE6 MODE7 F2

(2/2)

Select mode

* Cut *
Cut Yes/No +
Yes -


ENTER

* Nozzle *
Count -1 10000 + Number of endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* Nozzle *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



ENTER or CANCEL

* Nozzle *
End 50



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




196
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.9. General Endurance Menu
This menu performs the general endurance running.
You can operate various driving systems according to your desired settings.
The available settings are shown below.
Setup item Description Parameters Remarks
Operation speed (CW,
CCW)
Sets carriage operation speed (CW
and CCW).
240/300 Unit: cps
Media feed amount Set the media feed amount per cycle 0 to 100 Unit: mm
Number of endurance
running cycles
Set the number of endurance running
cycles
-1 to 10000


Notes :

If the number of endurance running cycles is set to -1, the units continuously repeat
endurance running until a key input is given from the operation panel.
The maximum counter value for endurance running cycles is 99999999 (up to 8-digit
number). If the number of cycles exceeds the maximum value, the counter is reset to 0.


* Speed CW *
Speed 240 / 300 + Speed (CW)
240 cps -


ENTER

* Speed CCW *
Speed 240 / 300 + Speed (CCW)
240 cps -


ENTER

* Feed Amount *
0 100.0 mm + Media feed amount
0.1 mm -


ENTER

* Life Count *
Count -1 10000 + Number of total endurance running cycles
50 -


ENTER

* Total Life *
Count 5 Perform endurance running



ENTER or CANCEL

* Total Life *
End 50


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




197
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.9.10. Endurance Running Check Menu
In this menu, you can confirm the number of endurance running cycles that have been already finished.
The number of endurance running cycles is stored in NVRAM in the system. Therefore, even if a serious
error occurs during endurance running, you can confirm the number of finished cycles just before the
occurrence of the serious error.

* Check *
CR Motor 50 Number of endurance running cycles (CR Motor)
PF Motor 0 Number of endurance running cycles (PF Motor)
(1/5)

* Check *
Cutter 33 Number of endurance running cycles (Cutter)
Head U/D 55 Number of endurance running cycles (Head
(2/5) up/down)

* Check *
Head lock 77 Number of endurance running cycles (head lock)
Wiper 77 Number of endurance running cycles (wiper)
(3/5)

* Check *
Pump 77 Number of endurance running cycles (pump mot)
Lever Motor 77 Number of endurance running cycles (sequential
(4/5) Printing)

* Check *
Nozzle 77
Total Life 88 Number of endurance running cycles (All)
(5/5)


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




198
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.10. HEAD LOCK MENU
Lock and unlock the head lock.
The following items are in the head lock menu.

Lock: Locks the head.
Unlock: Releases the head lock.


* Head lock *
F1 Lock Unlock F2

(1/1)

Select (unlock)

* Unlock *
Wait Little time




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




199
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.11. HEATER SYSTEM MENU
This section describes the heater system menu.
This menu is used to evaluate the heating elements of the printer.

Initialization item Description Refer to
Status This menu displays the status of the heating system. Heater Status Menu
Temperature This menu displays the real temperature of the heating
elements.
Heater Temperature
Menu
Test 30 This menu heats the temperature up to 30C. Heater Test 30 Menu
Test 50 This menu heats the temperature up to 50C. Heater Test 50 Menu
Test Max This menu heats the temperature up to the maximum
temperature.
Heater Test Max Menu
Version This menu displays the version of the control heater
board.
Heater Version Menu
Adjust For calibration of the heaters.
For future use only!
Heater Adjust Menu


* Heating System *
F1 Status Temperature F2
F3 Test 30 Test 50 F4
(1/2)

* Heating System *
F1 Test Max Test Aging F2
F3 Version
(2/2)


5.11.1. Heater Status Menu

This menu displays the status of the heating system.

* Status *
Heater Standby
No errors



5.11.2. Heater Temperature Menu

This menu displays the real temperature of the heating elements.

* Temperature *
A : R25
B1 : R24 B2 : R24 C : R25
D1 : R26 D2 : R26


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




200
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.11.3. Heater Test 30 Menu

This menu heats the temperature up to 30C.

* Test 30 *
Sending to heat system



The display will mention de current temperature. You can follow the heating of the heater elements on the
display up to 30C.

* Temperature *
A : R30
B1 : R30 B2 : R30 C : R31
D1 : R31 D2 : R31


5.11.4. Heater Test 50 Menu

This menu heats the temperature up to 50C.

* Test 50 *
Sending to heat system



The display will mention de current temperature. You can follow the heating of the heater elements on the
display up to 30C.

* Temperature *
A : R50
B1 : R50 B2 : R50 C : R51
D1 : R50 D2 : R50


5.11.5. Heater Test Max Menu

This menu heats the temperature up to maximum temperature.

* Test MAx *
Sending to heat system



The display will mention de current temperature. You can follow the heating of the heater elements on the
display up to 30C.

* Temperature *
A : R50
B1 : R70 B2 : R70 C : R70
D1 : R50 D2 : R50

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




201
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.11.6. Test Aging Menu
Display:
* TestHeaterAging *
# 20 12mins ON+FAN
A:45 B1:60 B2:60
C:50 D1:40 D2:40

Line2 explanation:

# 20 : Indicates the index number of the current cycle.
When going to the next cycle, this number is increased with 1.
This number will also be displayed when an error occurs, so you know the moment when the error
occurred.
12mins : minutes remaining in the current cycle
ON+FAN: ON means heating, OFF means cooling down, FAN means fans on.
Cycles:
Heating to max temps with fans on: 20min #0,4,8,12,16,
Cooling down with fans on: 10min #1,5,9,13,17,
Heating to max temps with fans off: 20min #2,6,10,14,18,
Cooling down with fans off: 10min #3,7,11,15,19,

5.11.7. Heater Version Menu

This menu displays the version of the control heater board.

* Version *
Ver = 2.03


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




202
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.12. SOL PREPARE MENU
Loading ink for the first time. Please refer to the Users Guide.

* SOL prepare*
Init.SOL flag + F2
Reset - F4


5.13. SMS MENU
*GEN-3 ink support *
Init.GEN-3 flag + F2
Set - F4

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




203
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

5.13. MACHINE SIZE SELECT MENU
This section describes the select menu of the machine size.
Used when the Mainboard is exchanged, etc.

Step 1 : If the system is in the operation mode or the self-diagnosis menu mode, press the [POWER] key
to power off the unit.

Step 2 : Press the [POWER] key while simultaneously pressing and holding the [MENU ] key and the
[MENU ] key.



Step 3 : Select the machine size.

* MachineSize *
F1 65inch 90inch F2

- 65inch - (1/1)

Select item


Select Finish !
Please re-starting


Step 4 : Power OFF the unit.




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




204
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




205
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

6. MAINTENANCE MODE
6.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the maintenance mode.
The maintenance mode provides the user with functions of displaying and initializing the life counters.
It is used in the manufacturing process, adjustment and maintenance.
The maintenance mode is implemented in the system firmware. All functions are available from the
operation panel.


Notes :

Refer to Operation Panel ".


6.2. OPERATING MAINTENANCE MODE
This section explains how to start up and operate the maintenance mode and provides the list of available
diagnosis items.

6.2.1. Starting Up Maintenance Mode
To use the maintenance mode, you should first call up the maintenance menu on the operation panel.
The maintenance menu is completely independent of the normal operation mode and setup menu display
mode. To call up the maintenance menu, follow the steps below.

Step 1 : If the system is in the operation mode or the setup menu mode, press the [POWER] key.

Step 2 : Press and hold the [F1] key, [F3] key and [MENU ] key simultaneously. While holding down
these keys, press the [POWER] key.
The system will enter the maintenance mode and display the maintenance menu.



6.2.2. Operating Maintenance Mode
For operating the maintenance mode, refer to "Operations in Self-Diagnosis Mode".
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




206
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

6.3. MAINTENANCE MENU
The maintenance menu includes the following diagnosis items.

Initialization item Description Refer to
Counter Display Menu This menu displays the life counters. Counter Display Menu
Counter Initialization
Menu
Initializes the service life counter. Counter Initialization Menu
MAC address write
enable menu
Performs network MAC address writing. MAC address write enable
menu

* Counter *
F1 Indication InitMenu F2
F3 MACaddress Head VLT F4


6.3.1. Counter Display Menu
This menu displays the life counters. It consists of the following diagnosis items.

Diagnosis item Description
Rest ink 1 Displays ink consumption counter (1).
Rest ink 2 Displays ink consumption counter (2).
Rest ink 3 Displays ink consumption counter (3).
Rest ink 4 Displays ink consumption counter (4).
Rest ink 5 Displays ink consumption counter (5).
Rest ink 6 Displays ink consumption counter (6).
Rest ink 7 Displays ink consumption counter (7).
Rest ink 8 Displays ink consumption counter (8).
Cutter service life Displays the cutter service life counter.
Number of prints Displays the counter for the total number of prints.
Waste ink Displays the service life counter for the waste liquid tank (right).
Cleaner Displays the cleaning unit life counter.
CR motor Displays the CR motor service life counter.
PF motor Displays the PF motor service life counter.
Pump A Displays the number of pump cycles of pump A
Pump B Displays the number of pump cycles of pump B
Head 1 A Displays the service life counter for nozzle A of head unit 1.
Head 1 B Displays the service life counter for nozzle B of head unit 1.
Head 2 A Displays the service life counter for nozzle A of head unit 2.
Head 2 B Displays the service life counter for nozzle B of head unit 2.
Head 3 A Displays the service life counter for nozzle A of head unit 3.
Head 3 B Displays the service life counter for nozzle B of head unit 3.
Head 4 A Displays the service life counter for nozzle A of head unit 4.
Head 4 B Displays the service life counter for nozzle B of head unit 4.


Notes :

All life counters are displayed in decimal number.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




207
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


* INDICATION *
RestInk 1 00000000
RestInk 2 00000000
(1/12)

* INDICATION *
RestInk 3 00000000
RestInk 4 00000000
(2/12)

* INDICATION *
RestInk 5 00000000
RestInk 6 00000000
(3/12)

* INDICATION *
RestInk 7 00000000
RestInk 8 00000000
(4/12)

* INDICATION *
CutterLife 00000000
PrintNumber 00000000
(5/12)

* INDICATION *
WasteInk 00000000
Cleaner 00000000
(6/12)

* INDICATION *
CR Motor 00000000Mdot
PF Motor 00000000Mdot
(7/12)

* INDICATION *
Pump A 00000000
Pump B 00000000
(8/12)

* INDICATION *
Head 1A 00000000Mdot
Head 1B 00000000Mdot
(9/12)

* INDICATION *
Head 2A 00000000Mdot
Head 2B 00000000Mdot
(10/12)

* INDICATION *
Head 3A 00000000Mdot
Head 3B 00000000Mdot
(11/12)

* INDICATION *
Head 4A 00000000Mdot
Head 4B 00000000Mdot
(12/12)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




208
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


6.3.2. Counter Initialization Menu
This menu initializes the life counters. The parameters that can be initialized in this menu are as follows.

Diagnosis item Description
Number of prints
initialization
Initializes the total number of printing counter.
Ink initialization Initializes the ink capacity counter.
Waste ink initialization Initializes the waste fluid tank service life counter.
Head error reset Resets critical trouble errors due to over-current flowing the head.
Ink ID mask initialization Resets the ink ID mask.
Total initialization Initializes the service life counter.
NVRAM initialization Initializes NVRAM.
Timer initialization Initializes the timer.
Cutter initialization Initializes the cutter cumulative counter.
CR motor initialization Initializes the CR motor service life counter.
PF motor initialization Initializes the PF motor service life counter.
Cleaning initialization Initializes the cleaning wiper service life counter.
Pump A Initializes the head pump life service counter for heads 1 and 2
Pump B Initializes the head pump life service counter for heads 3 and 4
Head unit 1 initialization Initializes the head 1 nozzle service life counter.
Head unit 2 initialization Initializes the head 2 nozzle service life counter.
Head unit 3 initialization Initializes the head 3 nozzle service life counter.
Head unit 4 initialization Initializes the head 4 nozzle service life counter.

* Init*
PrintNumber Ink ID
WasteInk Head error
(1/5)

* Init*
Ink All
NVRAM Timer
(2/5)

* Init*
TotalCut CR motor
PF motor Cleaning
(3/5)

* Init*
Pump A Pump B
Head Unit 1 Head Unit 2
(4/5)


Head Unit 3 Head Unit 4

(4/5)




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




209
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

6.3.3. MAC address write enable menu
It could happen that the computer cannot make connection with the Spitfire. If this is the case, the MAC
address of the Spitfire has probably been set to zero or incorrect.

To insert the MAC address into the Spitfire, please follow the instructions mentioned below.


Notes :

For the MAC address, a unique number is assigned for each unit. Do not use this
function except when intending to recover following deletion of the MAC address.


6.3.3.1. Request correct MAC address

Step 1 : Remove the Right Cover.

Step 2 : Remove the Ethernet Board Cover.

Step 3 : Onto the installed card you can see a sticker with a FM0 number.



Notes :

Write down this number FM0 xxxxxx. Important are the 6 digits x.

Step 4 : Based on this number Mutoh Europes service department can provide you the correct MAC
address for your printer.

Step 5 : Reinstall the covers.

6.3.3.2. Insert the MAC address into the printer

Step 1 : Power on the unit in a special mode. Press the [POWER] key to power ON the unit, while
simultaneously holding the [F1], [F3] and [Menu ] key.

Step 2 : The unit will start up in special mode. Following message will appear on the display.

* Counter *
Indication InitMenu
F3 MACaddress


Step 3 : Press the [F3] key to select the option MAC Address. Following message will appear on the
display.

* MAC address *
Input Password



Step 4 : Press the [F2] key.

Step 5 : Press the [F3] key.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




210
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 6 : Press the [F1] key.

Step 7 : Press the [F4] key.

Step 8 : The password has been inserted. Use the [F1], [F2], [F3] and [F4] key to insert the MAC
address.

Step 9 : Press the [ENTER] key to confirm.

Step 10 : Press the [POWER] key to power OFF the unit.


6.3.4 Head Voltage

In this menu, you can change the head voltage compensation value from -9 to +2.5. The default value is 0.

If your Spitfire does not print perfectly in 360x360, change the value to optimize your printquality.

* Head VLT *
0.0 +
-

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




211
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7. ADJUSTMENTS
7.1. INTRODUCTION
Adjustments and adjustment procedures required when replacing parts are explained in this chapter.


Notes :

Refer to Jig and tool list ".


7.2. ADJUSTMENT
The adjustments required when replacing parts are explained below.
When adjusting or replacing maintenance parts shown in the table below, a printing adjustment is required
using the auto-diagnostic function on the printer. Refer to the table below while making adjustments.

Replaced or
adjusted part
Adjustment
order
Adjustment Refer to
1 Head rank input (including initial filling) Head rank input menu
2 Head nozzle check Head Nozzle Check
Menu
3 Head angle check Head Slant Check
Menu
4 Head precision adjustment Head precision
adjustment
5 Repeatability adjustment Repeatability
Adjustment Menu
6 CW adjustment CW Adjustment Menu
7 Test Print Test print menu
Print head
8 Head unit lifespan count reset Parameter
Initialization Menu
1 Parameter backup Parameter backup
2 Firmware installation Firmware installation
3 Machine size select Machine size select
menu
4 Backup parameter installation Backup parameter
installation procedure
5 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment Media sensor
sensitivity adjustment
6 Head rank input Head rank input menu
7 Head nozzle check Head Nozzle Check
Menu
8 Head angle check Head Slant Check
Menu
9 Repeatability adjustment Repeatability
Adjustment Menu
Mainboard
assembly
10 CW adjustment CW Adjustment Menu
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




212
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

11 Band feed correction Band Feed Correction
Menu (X Length)
12 Top and bottom adjustment Top & bottom
adjustment menu
13 Rear sensor position adjustment P_REAR sensor
position adjustment
menu

14 Test Print Test print menu
1 CR deceleration belt tension adjustment Steel belt tension
adjustment
2 Repeatability adjustment Repeatability
Adjustment Menu
3 Top and bottom adjustment Top & bottom
adjustment menu
4 Test Print Test print menu
CR motor
assembly
5 Initializing CR motor history Parameter
Initialization Menu
1 PF deceleration belt tension adjustment PF deceleration belt
tension adjustment
2 Band feed correction Band Feed Correction
Menu (X Length)
3 Top and bottom adjustment Top & bottom
adjustment menu
4 Rear sensor position adjustment P_REAR sensor
position adjustment
menu
5 Test Print Test print menu
PF motor
assembly
6 Initializing PF motor history Parameter
Initialization Menu
1 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment Media sensor
sensitivity adjustment
P_EDGE sensor
assembly
2 Top and bottom adjustment Top & bottom
adjustment menu
Cover sensor
assembly
1 Cover sensor assembly position adjustment Cover sensor
adjustment
1 PF_ENC inspection Encoder Menu
2 Band feed correction Band Feed Correction
Menu (X Length)
3 Top and bottom adjustment Top & bottom
adjustment menu
PF_ENC
assembly
4 Test Print Test print menu
1 Cutter adjustment
Cutter adjustment
Sub-platen
2 Cutter endurance operation check
Cutter Endurance menu
1 CR encoder inspection Encoder Menu
2 Repeatability adjustment Repeatability
Adjustment Menu
3 Top and bottom adjustment Top & bottom
adjustment menu
T fence
4 Test Print Test print menu
CR slave pulley 1 Steel belt tension adjustment Steel belt tension
adjustment
1 Cutter adjustment Cutter adjustment Cutter holder
assembly
2 Cutter endurance operation check Cutter Endurance
menu
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




213
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

1 Head height adjustment Head height
adjustment
2 Media sensor sensitivity adjustment Media sensor
sensitivity adjustment
3 Continuous printing endurance operation
check
Head Nozzle Check
Menu
Sequential Printing
Endurance Menu
4 Head nozzle check Head Nozzle Check
Menu
5 Head angle check Head Slant Check
Menu
6 Head precision adjustment Head precision
adjustment
7 Repeatability adjustment Repeatability
adjustment Menu
8 CW adjustment Repeatability
Adjustment Menu
9 Top and bottom adjustment P_REAR sensor
position adjustment
menu
Carriage
assembly
10 Test Print Test print menu


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




214
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.3. PARAMETER BACKUP
This chapter explains the different types of parameter backup methods.
The different backup parameters related to the operation of the printer are recorded on the NVRAM (Flash-
ROM or EEPROM) installed on the Mainboard.
There are the following types of backup parameters.
Panel setting values
Mechanism adjustment values
Mainboard adjustment values


Notes :

For the backup parameter, the Mainboard adjustment values cannot be changed or
deleted.


If it is necessary to replace the Mainboard while performing maintenance work, make a parameter backup.
You can shorten some of the adjustment procedures by matching the printer mechanism with the new
Mainboard.


Caution :

Before making a parameter backup, make sure that the power source to the printer is
OFF. If the operation is performed with the power source on, the Mainboard could be
damaged and the data may not be installed correctly.



7.3.1. Tools required for work
The following tools are required for the parameter backup procedure.
Flash memory card


Notes :

Refer to Jig and tool list.

Use the memory card written in "Procedure for creating backup parameters" for
parameter backup of the unit only.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




215
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.3.2. Procedure for creating backup parameters
This section explains the procedure for recording backup parameters from the Mainboard assembly onto a
memory card.
Use the following procedure to create backup parameters.


Important :

Before replacing parts, be sure to perform the following operations.
Turn the machine power OFF.
Remove the product's electrical plug from the socket. Otherwise, you
may suffer electric shock or the machines electric circuits may be
damaged.

Disconnect all cables from the machine. Not doing so could cause damage to
the printer.


Step 1 : Remove the memory cover.

Step 2 : Install the memory card for parameter backup into the memory card connector slot (J104) on the
mainboard assembly.


Notes :

Install the memory card so that its front is toward the inside of the printer.


Step 3 : Turn the power to the printer on.
After all of the lamps on the operation panel light up, the LED display on the panel displays
"PRINTERCARD".

Step 4 : Press the [ENTER] key on the operation panel.
The LED display on the operation panel displays "PC Started".
Backup parameter creation begins.

Step 5 : If the backup parameter has been created correctly, "PC Completed" is displayed on the
operation panel.

Step 6 : Turn off the power source to the printer.

Step 7 : Remove the memory card for parameter backup.


Notes :

If you do not have backup memory card, output "Adj. Variable" in "Sample Printing
Menu". Required parameter is output.

For the panel setting value, output "Setup" in the Operation Manual. Maintenance
history is not printed.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




216
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.3.3. Backup parameter installation procedure
The following is the procedure for installing the backup parameter from the memory card into the new
Mainboard assembly.
Use the following procedure to install backup parameters.

(1) When using a flash memory card
Step 1 : Install the memory card for the backup into the memory card connector slot for the new
Mainboard assembly.


Notes :

Install the memory card so that its front is toward the inside of the printer.


Step 2 : Turn the power to the printer on.
After all of the lamps on the operation panel come on, the LED display on the panel displays
"PRINTERCARD".

Step 3 : Press either the [MENU ] key or [MENU ] key on the operation panel.
"CARDPRINTER" is displayed on the LED display on the operation panel.

Step 4 : Press the [ENTER] key on the operation panel.
The LED display on the operation panel displays "CP Started".
Backup parameter creation begins.

Step 5 : If the backup parameter has been created correctly, "CP Completed" is displayed on the
operation panel.

Step 6 : Turn off the power source to the printer.

Step 7 : Remove the memory card for parameter backup.

Step 8 : Reinstall the memory cover

(2) When not using a flash memory card
The settings should be input by the panel.
Input following the procedures below.

Step 1 : Install the firmware according to "Firmware installation".

Step 2 : Follow the instructions in "Machine size select menu" to select the machine size.

Step 3 : Initialize NVRAM according to "Counter Initialization Menu".

Step 4 : Follow the instructions in "Parameter Update Menu" and refer to the printed adjustment variable
to enter following setting value.

Head voltage
Printing position alignment (Bi-D)
CW adjustment
Media feed distance
Mechanical parameter (Top margin, Bottom margin, Side margin, P_REAR sensor position)
Ink parameter (Initial ink charge flag)
Ink ID mask
Serial number
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




217
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.4. FIRMWARE INSTALLATION
The procedure for installing firmware is explained below.
The programs (firmware) that control the operation of the printer are recorded on the NVRAM (Flash-ROM)
installed on the Mainboard.
Install firmware when performing the following maintenance operations.
When replacing the Mainboard assembly
When upgrading firmware



Caution :

Before installing firmware, be sure that the power to the printer is turned off.
Performing these operations with the power on could result in damage to the Mainboard
assembly or cause the data to not be installed correctly.



7.4.1. Tools required for work
The following tools are required to install firmware.
Flash memory card or compatible computer


Notes :

Refer to Jig and Tool list.



7.4.2. Installation procedure
The procedure for installing firmware is explained below.
Use the following procedure to install firmware.


Important :

Before replacing parts, be sure to perform following operations.
Turn the machine power OFF.
Remove the product's electrical plug from the socket. Otherwise, you
may suffer electric shock or the machines electric circuits may be
damaged.

Disconnect all cables from the machine. Not doing so could cause damage to
the printer.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




218
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) When using a flash memory card
Step 1 : Remove the memory cover.

Step 2 : Install the memory card for the installation of firmware into the memory card connector slot (J104)
of the Mainboard assembly.


Notes :

Install the memory card so that its front points towards the inside of the printer.


Step 3 : Turn the power of the printer ON.

Step 4 : Firmware installation starts.

Step 5 : Check if the buzzer sounded and whether the firmware was installed correctly.

Step 6 : Turn off the power source to the printer.

Step 7 : Remove the memory card for firmware installation.

Step 8 : Reinstall the memory cover.


(2) When using a computer
Step 1 : Using a printer cable, connect the PC to the printer.

Step 2 : Turn the power of the printer ON.
All lamps will flash for an instant.

Step 3 : Press the [F2] key on the operation panel within 1 second.
The message "Ready to load" is displayed and the firmware install mode takes effect.



Step 4 : Send new firmware data by MS-DOS copy command etc. (e.g. "COPY /B rh2.04.jfl LPT1")

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




219
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Firmware installation will take about 60 seconds. The following messages will appear in order on
the LED display on the operation panel during installation.
Loading"
"Erasing"
"Copying"
"Comparing"
"End"

Step 5 : Check if the buzzer sounded and whether the firmware was installed correctly.

Step 6 : Power the unit OFF.


Important :

After installation of the firmware onto the Spitfire, you must upgrade the heater
system board.


(3) Updating the heater system board

To update the heater system board of a Spitfire, please follow the instructions mentioned below.


Important :

Before updating the heater system board, make sure you already installed the
firmware into the Spitfire.


Step 1 : Make sure the printer is OFF.

Step 2 : Press simultaneously the [CANCEL] and the [ENTER] key while turning the printer ON.

Step 3 : The display will mention the following message.

* User Setting *
Rem Update
F2 CRD Update
(1/1)

Step 4 : Press the [F2] key.

Step 5 : The heater system board is now being updated. The display will mention the following
messages.
Erasing sectors
Wait flash programming

Step 6 : At the end the display will mention the following message.

Card Update
DO NOT POWER DOWN
Version Installed


Step 7 : Press the [CANCEL] key.

Step 8 : Power OFF the unit.

Step 9 : Updating the heater system board is completed.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




220
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.5. STEEL BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
The procedure for adjusting the steel belt tension is explained below.
This section explains the procedure for adjusting steel belt tension. When removing/installing the steel belt,
adjust its tension.


7.5.1. Tools required for work
The following tools are required when adjusting the tension of the steel belt.
Tension gauge: max. 2.0 N (200 g)
Steel belt tension attachment 2: for gauge diameter 2mm (0.08in.) or less


Notes :

Refer to jig and Tool list.



7.5.2. Adjustment Procedure
Use the following procedure to adjust the tension of the steel belt.

Step 1 : Place the tension gauge at the center of the steel belt.



1 = steel belt 2 = Tension gauge


Notes :

The regulation values for the tension of the steel belt are shown below.
65 inch specifications: 1.0 N 0.1 N (100 g 10 g)
90 inch specifications: 0.9 N 0.1 N (90 g 10 g)



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




221
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 2 : If the tension of the steel belt is not within the range of regulated values, adjust the steel belt
tension screws.



1 = Steel belt 2 = Steel belt tension screw
3 = CR slave pulley

Step 3 : Move the CR cursor to the left and right once or twice. Adjust the CR driven pulley until the
upper and lower margins are identical.


Caution :

If the tension is not equivalent across the entire belt, it could snap during operation.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




222
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.6. PF DECELERATION BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
The procedure for adjusting the tension of the PF deceleration belt is explained below.
When removing the PF motor or removing/installing the PF deceleration belt, adjust the tension of the PF
deceleration belt.

7.6.1. Tools required for work

The following tools are required to adjust the tension of the PF deceleration belt.
Tension gauge: max. 50 N (5 kgf)


Notes :

Refer to Jig and tool list


7.6.2. Adjustment Procedure

Use the following procedure to adjust the tension of the PF deceleration belt.

Step 1 : Loosen the 2 screws fixing the PF motor installation board.

Step 2 : Install the tension gauge on the PF motor installation board and pull it in the direction shown on
the figure below.



1 = PF deceleration belt 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the PF motor installation
board
3 = PF motor installation board 4 = Tension gauge


Notes :

The regulated value of the tension for the PF deceleration belt is 34.32 N 10 % (3,5
kgf 10 %).


Step 3 : Tighten the 2 screws fixing the PF motor installation board.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




223
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.7. HEAD PRECISION ADJUSTMENT (SLANT)
This section explains the procedure for adjusting the head angle.
When replacing the head assembly, use the following procedure to adjust the head angle and head
forward/rear position. See also technical bulletin 085.

7.7.1 Head slant adjustment

Step 1 : Start the self-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function


Step 2 : Select "Adj:HeadSlant".

Step 3 : Print "Slant" pattern.
If dotted lines on pattern CW and CCW are not a straight line, which you can check with a
magnifying glass (enlargement of at least 10), please go to step 4.


Notes :

When the printing pattern is printed, you will only see lines, and no notifications of ink
channels. The head sequence shown below.

1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4A, 4B


Step 4 : Loosen the screw (with one turn) fixing the head stationary plate.








Step 5 : Make adjustments until amount of CW and CCW offset are identical.

No. Part
1 Screw (M2.5x5) fixing the head stationary plate
2 Angle adjustment screw
3 Front and back adjustment screw
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




224
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Notes :

In theory, the alignment of CW and CCW should be identical. But in practice, it is
almost impossible to become a perfect alignment. When there is a slight difference
between CW and CCW, be sure the heads are well seated.

In case you only print uni directional, adjust the CW till it is aligned perfectly.
In case you print bi-directional, and CW and CCW cannot be aligned more perfectly.
Divide the fault equally.



Notes :

When printing the pattern, the head identifications 1A, 1B etc, are not printed.
Analyse the pattern as shown below. Be sure to have five lines for each color.





How to adjust What to become




No. Part
1 Angle adjustment screw


Step 6 : Tighten the screw fixing the head stationary plate.

Repeat step 1 to 6 until the adjustment is correct for all heads.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




225
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.7.2. Front and back of head adjustment
To perform a Head Front/Back Adjustment, please follow the steps mentioned below.

Step 1 : In diagnostic mode, go to [Adjust : Head Slant].


Step 2 : Press the [F2] key for F&B (front and back) adjustment.


* HeadSlant *
F1 Slant F&B F2
F3 Check End F4


Step 3 : Print out [Front/Back] pattern. First pattern A with 1A as reference is printed, then pattern B with
4B as reference and finally A+B.





A+B



B

4B is the
reference
head





A

1A is the
reference
head
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




226
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Notes :

To help you identify the print heads on the test pattern please refer to the diagram
below.


Know you see, 1A is Black, 1B is Yellow, etc (in our color combination).



Step 4 : Check if all nozzles are in 1 row by using a magnifying glass with an enlargement of at least 10.
If not, please proceed to step 5.

Step 5 : Loosen the screw with 1 turn, which secures the Head Fixing Plate.



No. Part
1 Head Fixing plate securing screw
2 Front/Back Adjustment Screw

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




227
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 6 : When the nozzles are not in one row, adjust the head front/back position by moving the Head
Front/Back Adjustment Screw the manner shown below. First adjust nozzle row A (1A, 2A, 3A,
4A). When adjusted perfectly, nozzle row B should automatically be adjusted. But in practice this
isnt always a fact. When your determine a small misalignment after adjusting A well, readjust
again until all nozzles of row A and B are perfectly aligned.




NOTE :

We only give an example for one colour combination. Please refer to Operation
Procedure Labels in the Maintenance Manual where you can find the other possible
colour combinations.



Step 7 : Tighten the screw which secures the Head Fixing Plate.

Step 8 : Repeat step 1 to 7 until the adjustment is correct.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




228
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.8. REPEATABILITY ADJUSTMENT (BI-DIRECTIONAL)

To perform a Repeatability Adjustment, please follow the steps mentioned below.

Step 1 : Start the self-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function".


Step 2 : Select "Adj:Bi-D".

Step 3 : Print a repeatability pattern.

Step 4 : The odd rows (with each 5 dots) are the references. So the even rows should be adjusted (use a
magnifying with an enlargement of at least 10)
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the right, you have to increase (+) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 30 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -10 for example
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the left, you have to decrease (-) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 10 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -30 for example



4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A 1B 1A


Notes :

For 90-inch specifications, the head 5-A, 5-B, 6-A, 6-B, 7-A, 7-B, 8-A, 8-B are
added.

Step 5 : Adjust reciprocation per head height.

#1: Head height LOW
#2: Head height MIDDLE
#3: Head height HIGH


Notes :

In the event that all parts of unit do not line up due to part or assembly precision
error, make adjustments until everything in the area around center lines up in a
straight line.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




229
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.9. CW ADJUSTMENTS (UNI-DIRECTIONAL)

To perform CW adjustments, please follow the steps mentioned below.

Step 1 : Start the self-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function".


Step 2 : Select "Adj:Uni-D".

Step 3 : Print a CW adjustment pattern.

Step 4 : The odd rows (alternately 1A and 1B) are the references. So the even rows (2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4 A
and 4B) should be adjusted (use a magnifying with an enlargement of at least 10)
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the right, you have to increase (+) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 30 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -10 for example
When you want to move the even rows (with dots) to the left, you have to decrease (-) the value.
For example: The value is 20, adjust it to 10 for example
The value is -20, adjust it to -30 for example

1B 1A 1B 1A 1B 1A



4B 4A 3B 3A 2B 2A


Notes :

For 90-inch specifications, the head 5-A, 5-B, 6-A, 6-B, 7-A, 7-B, 8-A, 8-B are
added.


Notes :

In the event that all parts of unit do not line up due to part or assembly precision
error, make adjustments until everything in the area around center lines up in a
straight line.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




230
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.10. CR DECELERATION BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
This section explains the procedure for adjusting the tension of the CR deceleration belt.
When removing/installing the CR deceleration belt, such as when removing the CR motor, adjust the tension
of the CR deceleration belt.


7.10.1. Tools required for work
The following tools are required to adjust the tension of the CR deceleration belt.
Tension gauge: max. 50 N (5 kgf)


Notes :

Refer to Jig and Tool List ".



7.10.2. Adjustment Procedure
Use the following procedure to adjust the tension of the CR deceleration belt.

Step 1 : Loosen the 4 hexagon socket head cap screws fixing the CR motor installation board.


1 = CR motor installation board 2 = Hexagon socket head cap screw
3 = CR motor assembly 4 = Tension gauge

Step 2 : Install the tension gauge on the PF motor installation board.

Step 3 : Pull the tension gauge in the direction of the arrow shown on the figure above.


Notes :

The regulated value of the tension for the CR deceleration belt is 34.32 N 10 %
(3,5 kgf 10 %).


Step 4 : Tighten the 4 hexagon socket head cap screws fixing the CR motor installation board.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




231
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.11. COVER SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
This section explains the procedure for adjusting the cover sensor.
When replacing the cover sensor assembly or removing/installing the front cover, use this procedure to
adjust the cover sensor.

Step 1 : Start the self-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function ".


Step 2 : Select "Check:Test" on the self-diagnostic menu.

Step 3 : In the inspection menu, select "Check : Check".

Step 4 : Select "Sensor:Etc." on the sensor menu.

Step 5 : Open and close the front cover assembly and make sure the dimension between the media guide
and the front cover end is 21 mm, and the display in the operation panel is switched as follows.

Front cover Operation panel display
Open Sensor: open
Closed Sensor: closed


Notes :

Use a block gauge to measure the height of the front cover when opening it.


Step 6 : If the opening height of the front cover and the information displayed on the operation panel are
different, adjust the installation position of the sensor cam.


1 = Sensor cam 2 = Set screw

Step 7 : Use step 5 to check the display on the operation panel once more.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




232
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.12. HEAD HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
This section explains the procedure for adjusting the head height.
If CR cursor assembly is changed, adjust head height.


7.12.1. Tools required for work
The following tools are required when adjusting the head height.
CR gap check jig


Notes :

Refer to Jig and Tool List".



7.12.2. Adjustment Procedure
Perform the head height adjustment following the procedures below.

Step 1 : Unlock the head lock according to "Head Lock Menu".

Step 2 : Move the CR cursor on the platen.

Step 3 : Remove the head cover according to "Removing the head cover".

Step 4 : Point slide gear mark down so that heads move into low position.

Step 5 : Loosen the screws (2, one on the right, one on the left) that fasten the head U/D eccentric shaft
lever.



1 = Head U/D eccentric shaft lever 2 = Screws fixing the head U/D eccentric shaft lever
3 = Slide gear 4 = Slide gear triangular mark

Step 6 : Put the CR gap adjusting jig on the platen.

Step 7 : Move the CR cursor so that 1.2mm side of adjustment jig makes contact with the side of head.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




233
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 8 : Adjust head U/D eccentric shaft lever so that CR gap adjustment jig can move freely.

Step 9 : Perform CR cursor right/left adjustment.



1 = Platen 2 = CR gap check jig
3 = Print head 4 = CR cursor
5 = Height 1.2 mm 6 = Height 1.3 mm
7 = CR gap adjustment jig 1.2 mm side

Step 10 : Fasten the screws (2, one on the right, one on the left) that fasten the head U/D eccentric shaft
lever.

Step 11 : Apply non reflective tape to the head U/D eccentric shaft lever as shown in the following printing:


Notes :

Completely cover the screw heads with non reflective tape. If non reflective tape
cannot be applied to chosen location, the head slide sensor may not detect screw
head properly.




1 = Head U/D eccentric shaft cover 2 = Nonreflective tape
3 = Screw fixing the head U/D eccentric shaft cover


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




234
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.13. MEDIA SENSOR SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
This section explains the procedure for adjusting the sensitivity of the media sensor.
When replacing the P_EDGE sensor assembly or Mainboard assembly, adjust the media sensor.


Notes :

Pay attention to the following points when adjusting the media sensor.
This should be performed in an area where sun light and illumination do not
influence the sensor.
The front cover and Y rail cover should be installed when performing the
work.
When making adjustments, hold the media by hand or the media hold lever
so that the media stays still on the sensor.

If the media is lifted off, the accuracy of the sensor may be affected.
A non-conductive type screw driver should be used when adjusting the
control on the Mainboard assembly.

Otherwise, a short circuit may result if the driver contacts the metal parts, such as
electronics parts on the Mainboard assembly or the frame.


7.13.1. Tools required for work
The following tools are required for adjusting the P_EDGE sensor.
Reference media: Double coated media (recommended media)


Notes :

Refer to Jig and Tool List".


7.13.2. Adjustment Procedure
Perform the adjustment following the procedures below.


Notes :

The adjustment values are as follows.
HIGH level (with media) A/D value
In decimal number : 216 to 223 (H)
LOW level (without media) A/D value
In decimal number : 48 to 0 (H)



(1) HIGH level (with media) adjustment of the A/D value

Step 1 : Set the standard media.

Step 2 : Select "Check : Head Lock" in the self-diagnosis menu.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




235
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function ".


Step 3 : Release the head lock.

Step 4 : Check if the installation angle of the P_EDGE sensor is 15.

Step 5 : In the inspection menu, select "Check : Check".

Step 6 : Display "Sensor : PaperEdgeAD".

Step 7 : Open the front cover.

Step 8 : Move the carriage so that the dimension between the right edge of the standard media and the
cutter is 5 to 10 cm.


1 = Razor Blade 2 = Carriage

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




236
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Step 9 : Adjust the P_EDGE sensor control shown in the following figure so that the values displayed in
the operation panel become the adjustment value.
Control R693: Rough adjustment
Control R694: Fine adjustment




(2) LOW level (without media) A/D value check

Step 1 : Adjust the A/D value of the HIGH level following the "(1) HIGH level A/D value adjustment"
procedure.

Step 2 : Align the cutter and the right edge of the standard media by moving the carriage.


1 = Razor Blade

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




237
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Notes :

Perform the following if the A/D values of the edge sensor are not the adjustment
value.
1 ) Checking the installation angle (about 15) of the P_EDGE sensor assembly
2 ) Replacing the P_EDGE sensor assembly
3 ) Re-inspecting the Mainboard assembly



Step 3 : Make sure that the values displayed in the operation panel are as shown below.
In hexadecimal number : 30 to 0
In decimal number : 48 to 0


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




238
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.14. CUTTER ADJUSTMENT
This section explains the procedure for adjusting the cutter.
When replacing the sub-platen, replacing the solenoid assembly, or removing/installing media guide F, use
this procedure to adjust the cutter.

Step 1 : Confirm if the media has been cut correctly.


Notes :

Refer to Cutter Endurance menu".


Step 2 : If media guide F has been installed at an angle, adjust it.


Notes :

Refer to Removing media guide F".


Step 3 : Loosen the screw fixing the cutter holder.


1 = Cutter holder 2 = Screws (M3x6) fixing the cutter holder

Step 4 : Slide the cutter holder forward and backward as shown in the following figure so that the
dimension between the cutter blade and the cutter groove of the sub-platen is 0.2 to 0.7 mm.

1 = Cutter holder 2 = Cutter groove of the sub-platen

Step 5 : Tighten the screw fixing the cutter holder.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




239
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 6 : Insert paper into unit. Manually place an indentation into paper.

Step 7 : Confirm that the distance between paper indentation and cutter groove is between 0.2 and
0.7mm.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




240
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.15. PUMP TUBING LAYOUT FOR PUMP ASSEMBLY
7.15.1 Pump tubing layout



1 = waste tube connection 2 = connection to the head caps

Spitfire 65/90


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




241
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Notes :

1. Please be careful, when replacing the tubings, it is possible to have kinks in the
tubings. Please avoid this by turning the tubing to the left or the right at the
head connection and/or waste tube connection.
2. Also be careful the tubings do not touch or get stuck in the gears.



1 Critical tubings
2 Gears







Spitfire Maintenance Manual




242
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.16. BOARD CHECKLIST
7.16.1. Power supply board.



ON OFF Flashing Green LED on Power
Supply Power supply works ok Power supply is not
working.
220V/110V?
Load connected to
PS?
Error message on
Spitfire: Heat system not
found(*)

Power supply is not
starting.
Load connected?
Restart machine (wait
10 sec after power off)
Error message Heat
System Not Found (*)
Damaged power
supply replace



Notes :

(*) In case of this error message, it is possible that the supply does not work due to a
snubber problem on the power distribution board (EY-80203). 3 possibilities:

Snubber resistor cut with cap=100nF (Malfunction is not caused by the snubber)
Resistor not cut, capacitor = 4,7nF (disc shape) (Malfunction is not caused by
the snubber)
Resistor not cut, capacitor = 100nF (rectangular shape), malfunction may be
caused by snubber, so cut resistor.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




243
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.16.2. Control board.




POWER ON OFF LED D8
GREEN Board has 5V => ok Board has no 5V
Power cable connected?
Power supply green led ON?
Bad cable
LED D2 ALIVE Blinking: OK Fatal error:P lockup
LED D1 ERROR No error Error occurred
LED D5 8000 RX/TX Communication ok No communication
LED D7 8000 RX/TX Communication ok No communication
LED D3 Programming led Not used for user!!
LED D6 Programming led Not used for user!!
OK Burned SMD L11, L2,L6,L13

Coil
No problem Temperature sensor cable shorted
to chassis, indication which cable
has a problem.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




244
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.16.3. Power board.



RED/GREEN(revC) ON OFF D2
From rev C on, it will be
a green led
OK NO +24V present
PS ok?
Power cable ok?
RED ON OFF D1
110/220V indicator Should be on in a 110V
grid.
Should be off in a 220V
grid.
ON OFF RED
Heater is on Heater is off
D23, 21,19,13,6,4
During cold start-up, the selftest will run.
All leds should go on, one at a time, for a short period.

After a warm start-up, the selftest will not run.

During normal operation: leds can go on in a random manner.


7.16.4. Heater Elements

Resistance () 65 90
A 2 x 32,3 2 x 24,2
B1/B2 2 x 65,5 2 x 44
C 2 x 32,3 2 x 22,5
D1/ D2 2 x 22,5 2 x 22,5
Thermal Sensor 10k 10k

When checking the thermal sensors, also measure them with the chassis as a reference. If the resistance is
not infinite, the sensor has a short circuit, mostly due to a damaged cable.

If the resistance is infinite, the thermal fuse might be blown. Or in minor cases, check for bad connections at
heater elements and connector.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




245
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



Connector:


Tips

Safety relay

On the powerboard is a safety relay that will switch 220 or 110V to the solid state relays whenever the
Spitfire is powered off. This is to prevent that defective solid state relays can make the heatstrips overheat
and melt its fuses.

Buzzer:

1 small beep for each heater that reached the desired temperature.
3 short beeps when heater accepts new data coming from the Spitfire.
4 seconds beep => error.

Heater D

In case of a defective fuse on a D-heater, check for isolation on the temperature sensors. Some machines
were released without isolation patches on the temperature sensors and cause the strips to overheat.

Heater A

In earlier machines strips were mounted with a fuse with a critical, narrow margin. Please do not pass 48C
in the menu setting. This will be solved in successive firmware releases after 1.04.

FLAT Strip

In case of a DIY replacement of a heatstrip, make sure that the strip is flatly mounted! Air gaps between strip
and plate can cause overheating and cause fire!

Firmware Bugs

Check the firmware division for these.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




246
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


7.16.5. Checklist

Product information :
Serial Number : ________________________________________________
Firmware Version : ________________________________________________
Firmware Version Heater Control Board : ________________________________________________


Basic diagnostics :
Grid power 110V 220V
Grid frequency 50Hz 60Hz
Fuse 1 OK NOK (OPEN)

Power Supply :
LED (Green) ON : OFF : Flashes :

Control Board :
LEDS : ON OFF Flashes
LED D8
LED D1
LED D2
LED D5
LED D7
LED D3
LED D6

Filters OK Bad (visual)
SMD L11
SMD L2
SMD L6
SMD L8

Power Board :
D2 Red/Green (revC) Power ON : OFF :
D1 110V/220V ON : OFF :
D23, 21,19,13,6,4 Heater On Flashes?
Cold Start up : _______________________________________________
Operation : _______________________________________________

Heater elements :
Resistance () 65 90
A 2 x 32,3 2 x 24,2
B1/B2 2 x 65,5 2 x 44
C 2 x 32,3 2 x 22,5
D1/ D2 2 x 22,5 2 x 22,5
Thermal Sensor 10k 10k

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




247
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

7.17 FLUSHING BOX HEIGHT POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Incorrect position of the flushing box height will cause large ink drops on the printout.

Please follow the steps below to correctly adjust your flushing box height position.

Before adjustment of the flushing box height position, please make sure to have:
1. The Flush Box Height Jig Tool (JD-80001)
2. The Spacer kit flush box (KY-80002).

Step 1 : Remove the I/H cover.

Step 2 : Remove side cover R.

Step 3 : Remove side cover L.

Step 4 : Remove the front cover.

Step 5 : Start up in Diagnostic Mode and Unlock the Head

* Head lock *
F1 Lock Unlock F2

(1/1)

Select (unlock)

* Unlock *
Wait Little time



Step 6 : Move the carriage to the left and place the flushing box height jig tool on the flushing box.



1 = Flush box height jig tool


Step 7 : Turn the wheel of the carriage till the arrow is on the bottom so the carriage is in the lowest
position.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




248
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05



1 = Carriage wheel 2 = Arrow

Step 8 : Carefully move the carriage to the right. The carriage should pass the first interval but not the
second.



1 = Interval 1 3 = Reference of the head
2 = Interval 2

Step 9 : When the carriage pass both intervals, move the carriage to the left. Loosen the screw of the
flushing box a bit and install one or more spacers.



1 = Screw 2 = Spacer (0,5 mm or 1 mm)


Note:

The Spacer kit flush box (KY-80002) consists out of 10 spacers with thickness 0,5 mm
and 10 with thickness 1,0 mm.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




249
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Thickness: 0,5 mm (DF-44237) Thickness: 1,0 mm (DF-44236)






Step 10 : Tighten the screw and repeat step 10 to 12 until adjustment is correct.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




250
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




251
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8. MAINTENANCE
8.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information about the periodical services, part life, lubrication/bonding and transport.


Important :

Before replacing parts, be sure to perform following operations.
Turn the machine power OFF.
Remove the product's electrical plug from the socket. Otherwise, you
may suffer electric shock or the machines electric circuits may be
damaged.

Disconnect all cables from the machine. Not doing so could cause damage to
the printer.



Caution :

Ensure there is sufficient space around the printer when performing maintenance
work.

If you need to operate the printer with the cover removed for maintenance, be
careful not to get hurt by the moving parts.

In the periodical services, the following work must be performed with one or more
assistant worker.
Removing/attaching the unit and the stand
Packaging the machine for transport



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




252
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8.2. CLEANING
You need to clean the printer periodically to keep it in best working condition.


Notes :

Refer to the Users Guide.
Refer to Exploded Views/Service Parts List.


Part Timing Check point Action
Platen surface
Media guide F
Pressure rollers
Several times per year Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Damages
Clean it.

Please note : If ink
deposits are present,
remove them with a
dampened cloth and
wipe the area with a
clean dry cloth.

Timing fence
(CR encoder detection
slit plate)
Several times per year Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects
Damages

Clean it.
If any damages are
found, replace the part.

P_REAR sensor surface Several times per year Media dust
accumulation
Foreign objects

Clean it.
Cleaner head (Cleaning
wiper)
Several times per year Ink deposits
Damages

Clean it.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




253
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8.3. PERIODICAL SERVICES
This section describes the periodical services required for this machine.
The periodical services ensure stable printout quality of the machine.
In the periodical services, some service parts may be checked, cleaned or replaced.


Caution :

There are to parts of periodical service, namely the parts that can be replaced by
the end-user and the parts that needs to be done by authorized Mutoh technicians.


8.3.1. Service by end-user
Perform periodical inspections according to the table below.

Month Mainten.
Cycle 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 x x x x x X X X X X
2 X X
3 x x x x x X X X X X X X
4 x x x x x X X X X X X X
5
daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily
6
daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily
7
daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily daily
8
weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly
9
weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly weekly

N Part number Quantity Action
1 DE-11629+ME-80771+AP-51600 1+4+1 CHANGE WIPER ARM+WIPERS+SPONGE
2 MY-35381+ME-80771 1+4 CHANGE WIPER ARM ASSY + WIPERS + SPONGE
3 MY-80165
1
CHANGE UPPER SPONGE AT BACK OF CAPPING
STATION
4 KY-42889 1 Replacing the sponge in the spitting box.
5 KY-80228 (PJ-GLOV + B1-CON-PN-
44)
as required Clean wipers (use gloves and polyknit wipers)
6 KY-80228 (PP-10020 +
T17S250CLN)
as required Flush caps in main station (use pipet and solvent cleaning)
7 KY-80228 (PP-10020 +
T17S250CLN)
as required
Clean edges of the CAPS in main station (uses gloves and
polyknit wipers)
8 KY-80228 (PJ-GLOV + B1-CON-PN-
44)
as required
Clean area around the caps (uses gloves and polyknit
wipers)
9 KY-80228 (PJ-GLOV + PP-10001) as required Clean around bottom of heads (not nozzle plate)


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




254
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

User Maintenance Kit for Spitfire (KY-80229)




1 Wiper Arm 5 7 Spitting Box Pads 12
2 Wiper assembly 1 8 Polyknit wipers 300
3 Absorbent Plate 6 9 Gloves 300
4 Cleaning Liquid 250 ml 3 10 Swabs 150
5 Absorbents 25 11 Pipettes 60
6 Wipers 24

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




255
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8.3.2. Service by authorised Mutoh technician
Perform periodical inspections according to the table below.

Month Maintenance
Cycle 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10 X X
11 X X
12 X X
13 X X
14 X
15 X
16 X X
17 X X
18 X X
19 X X
20 X X

Maintenance
Cycle
Part number Quantity Action
10 MY-42110 8 Change dampers
11 MY-80300L 2 Change pumps (*)
12 ME-80035 4x0,8m Change tubes from pumps -> Waste bottle
13 DE-35085 + ME-80040 + ME-
60014
1 + 1m + 1 Change spitting box + tube + L connection
14 MY-80627 1 Change capping station
15 MY-80622 1 Change cap assy capping station
16 KY-80050 as required Apply grease on head up-down cams when needed
17 KY-80050 as required Apply grease on Y-motor belt when needed
18
KY-80050
as required Apply grease on roller path carriage when
needed (**)
19
KY-80050
as required Apply grease on capping station camm + gears
when needed
20 - as required Dust removal in fan area underneath print platform

maintenance cycle Kit 6 months (KY-80226)
Description
Partnr.
# Needed for : (Cycle)
1 Dampers MY-42110 8x 10
2 Pumps MY-80300L 2x 11
3 Tubing pumps ME-80035 3,2meter 12
4 Spitting box DE-35085 1x 13
5 Tubing ME-80040 1meter 13
6 L connection ME-60014 1x 13
7 Cap assy capping station MY-80622 1x 15
8 Grease for maintenance cycle KY-80050 1x 16 to 20

maintenance cycle kit 12 months (KY-80227)
Description
Partnr.
# Needed for : (Cycle)
1 Dampers MY-42110 8x 10
2 Pumps MY-80300L 2x 11
3 Tubing pumps ME-80035 3,2meter 12
4 Spitting box DE-35085 1x 13
5 Tubing ME-80040 1meter 13
6 L connection ME-60014 1x 13
7 Capping station MY-80627 1x 14
8 Grease for maintenance cycle KY-80050 1x 16 to 20
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




256
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Mainten.
cycle
Refer to :
10
1 = Dampers
2 Dampers / Head = 8 Dampers in total
11 Replacing the pump area
12 Pump tubing layout
13 Replacing the Flushing Box Assembly : Replacing the spitting box (DE-35085)
14 Replacing the Cap Station Assembly (Maintenance Assembly)
15 Replacing the Capping Station
16

1 = head up/down cams
17

1 = y motor belt
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




257
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

18

1 = roller path
2 = carriage

19

1 = capping station cam
2 = gears

20

1 = fan area


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




258
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8.4. PART LIFE INFORMATION
This section shows how to check the life of a service part.
To know the life of a service part, check the maintenance counter from the counter display menu in the
maintenance mode.


Notes :

Refer to "Counter Display Menu" for more details of the counter display menu.


Name Life expectancy Warning display
Print head 28 billion dot Warning at 95%
(Warning Head Life)



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




259
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8.5. JIG AND TOOL LIST
This section provides lists of jigs and tools required for service operations.
8.5.1. Required Tools
(1) Tools for part replacement

No. Name Part code Remarks
1 Philips driver No.2 Generic product Shaft length should be 250 mm or more.
2 Philips driver No.2 Generic product Shaft length should be 50 mm or less.
3 Philips driver No.1 Generic product Generic product For head adjustment, shaft length
150 mm or more
4 Flat-head driver Generic product
5 Pliers Generic product
6 Tweezers Generic product
7 Hexagon wrench (1.5 mm to
6.0 mm)
Generic product For head adjustment, etc.
8 Box driver (5.5 mm) Generic product For exchanging the mainboard
9 Box driver (7.0 mm) Generic product For exchanging the power board
10 E ring holder (E-2.5) Generic product JIS E-2.5
IWATA DENKO Co., Ltd.
11 E ring holder (E-4) Generic product JIS E-5
IWATA DENKO Co., Ltd.
12 Head cleaning jig JD-30410 Exclusive rubber bush, including mini fitting
4 set required per a main unit
13 Rubber bush JD-42052 Expendable supplies (exchange per using 20 times)
14 Mini fitting JD-42053 /
Generic product
Maker: Iuchi Seieido Co., Ltd.
15 Cleaning liquid T17S250CLN
16 Bottle for cleaning liquid (500
ml)
JD-42054 /
Generic product


(2) Tools for adjustment

No. Name Part code Remarks
1 Personal computer Generic product Printer port mounted parts
2 Printer cable Generic product Amphenol 36P, male connector
3 Tension gauge Generic product For measuring 5,000g Max.
Reference maker: Oba Keiki Seisakusho
4 Tension gauge Generic product Max. capacity should be 200 to 500g.
Reference maker: Oba Keiki Seisakusho
5 Y-axis tension attachment JD-42050 For steel belt tension adjustment
Gauge diameter: 4 mm (0.16in.) or less
6 Y-axis tension attachment 2 JD-42435 For steel belt tension adjustment
Gauge diameter: 2 mm (0.08in.) or less
7 CR gap check jig JD-42177 For head height adjustment
8 Flash memory card Generic product Spec.:
4MB Flash Memory Card
Type-II (PCMCIARel.2.1/JEIDAVer.4.2)
5V unique driving spec.
9 Loupe (equivalent to 10x) Generic product Generic product For head precision adjustment
10 Block gauge (21 mm) Generic product Generic product For cover sensor adjustment
11 Hand glass Generic product Generic product For checking the cap trace
12 Double coated media Exclusive
specified media
For adjusting printing accuracy and sensor sensitivity
Maker: Mitsubishi inkjet media
Product number: IJ-MatteCort 143
Other similar media
RJ6-THCCPAPE 137 (MUTOH)
13 Straight scale (1000 mm) Generic product

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




260
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8.6. LUBRICATION/BONDING
This section covers the lubrication/bonding information.
After disassembling/assembling this machine, always perform necessary lubrication/bonding according to the
table below.


Caution :

Do not oil the printer mechanism with oil other than designated by MUTOH. Doing
so may damage the parts or shorten the lifetime.


Parts Item Manufacturer Type
U/D gear of the
pressurizing arm
Apply to the gear
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Arm motor mounting plate
and intermediate gear
boar diameter part
Coating the
intermediate gear
boar part
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Deceleration pulley Apply to the driving
pulley
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
PF Driving
Components
X-axis deceleration belt Coating the
deceleration belt
gear intermesh part
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Coating the hole
that fastens the Y
drive base
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1 Y rail machining drawing
Coating the hole
that fastens the
return pulley
mounting plate
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Y rail and Roller guide When inserting the
Y rail, apply to the
lower face of the
roller guide.
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Pressurizing axis bearing Coating the upper
part and shaft
insertion part
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Pressurizing cam Apply to the cam
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Roller guide Apply to the roller
guide surface.
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Slide idler gear Apply to the gear
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Driving pulley Apply to the driving
pulley
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
CR Driving
Components
CR deceleration belt Coating the
deceleration belt
gear intermesh part
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Head U/D colour Apply to the head
U/D colour
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Head U/D cam Apply to the head
U/D cam
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Cursor
Components
Slide gear Apply to the gear
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Head base
components
Head installation board Apply to the screw
hole position which
fastens the shoulder
screw
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




261
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Maintenance
components
Maintenance assembly Apply to the gear
and cam
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Combined gear Apply to the gear
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Deceleration gear Apply to the gear
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Idler gear Apply to the gear
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Pump
Components
Idler gear axis Apply between the
pump base and the
idler gear axis.
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
Winding
components
Winding assembly (gear
components)
Apply to the gear
components
Kanto Kasei Co.,
Ltd.
FLOIL G-MK-1
PF Driving
Components
Set screw Apply the screw lock
to the coupling set
screw.
Loctite 243
CR Driving
Components
Adjusting screw of the CR
slave pulley
After adjusting the
steel belt, apply the
screw lock.
Loctite 243
Cursor
Components
Step-bore screw Screw lock applying
to the shoulder
screw that fastens
the cursor and head
mounting plate
Loctite 243
Maintenance
components
E ring Apply to each of the
E-rings (prevents
noise due to
vibration).
Loctite 243
Scroller
receptacle R
components
Set screw Apply the screw lock
to the adjusting
knob set screw.
Loctite 243
Others Screw Apply to the position
of the screw lock.
Loctite 243
PF Driving
Components
CR tape power cable Stick double-sided
tape to the CR tape
power cables
(locating).
Not specified
Head base
components
Head 2 tape wire Stick double-sided
tape to the head 2
tape power cables
(locating and
preventing
floatation).
Not specified
Pump
Components
Pump assembly Acetate tape is fixed
to the pump
assembly tube
(prevents dislodging
of tube).
Not specified
Others Locations where sharp
edges are likely to occur
Acetate tape is fixed
to tape electrical
wires and
harnesses, where
sharp edges are
likely to occur
(sharp edge
protection).
Not specified


Mutoh partnr. FLOIL G-MK-1 : KY-80050
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




262
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

8.7. TRANSPORTATION OF MACHINE
This section explains transferring and transporting the printer.
When you transport the printer, the printer should be repackaged using the original box and packing
materials, to protect it from vibration or impact.
Transport the printer following the procedures below.

(1) Task before transportation

Step 1 : Turn on the power to the product.

Step 2 : Verify if the product is at a normal status.

Step 3 : Start the auto-diagnostic function.


Notes :

Refer to Self-Diagnosis Function.


Step 4 : Select "Adj:CleanHead".

Step 5 : Select "CleanHead" menu.


Notes :

Refer to Head wash menu.


Step 6 : When the head cleaning has been finished, turn the power OFF.

Step 7 : Remove the scroller.

Step 8 : Disconnect the power cable and all other cables.

Step 9 : Remove the winding system installed.


Notes :

Refer to Users Guide of the Winding Systems.


Step 10 : Install the protective materials.


Notes :

Refer to the Users Guide.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




263
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Step 11 : Remove the product from the special stand.


Notes :

Refer to the Users Guide.


Step 12 : Package the machine.


(2) Task after transportation

Step 1 : Unpack, assemble, and install the machine.

Step 2 : Reinstall the winding system.


Notes :

Do not forget to align the winding system after installation. Please refer to the users
guide of your winding system.

Step 3 : Make the machine ready for operation.





Spitfire Maintenance Manual




264
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




265
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9. TROUBLESHOOTING
9.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains the procedures for troubleshooting this product.
When the product indicates a failure and an error message is also displayed on the control panel, refer to
"Troubleshooting procedures when a message has been displayed" and implement treatment. When the
product indicates failure but an error message has not been displayed, refer to "Troubleshooting procedures
when an error message has not been displayed" and implement treatment.


9.2. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WHEN A MESSAGE
HAS BEEN DISPLAYED
This chapter explains the messages displayed when the product is operating normally and when an error
occurs.
There are the following types of messages.

Priority
level
Message Type Description Refer to
1 Operating
condition display
Displayed when the product is operating
normally
Operating condition
display
2 Heating system
error
Displayed when heating element errors occurs
during operation.
Heating system error
3 Message type
errors
Message type errors are displayed when trouble
occurs during operation.
Message type errors
4 Data error Displayed when data communication trouble
occurs between the computer and this product.
Data error
5 Command errors Displayed when trouble occurs during analysis
of the command data that is sent to this product
from the computer.
Command errors
6 Errors requiring
restart
Displayed when trouble that is critical to the
operation of this product occurs.
Errors requiring
restart


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




266
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.2.1. Operating condition display
This chapter explains the messages displayed, the items to be confirmed and the remedy.

No. Message Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) Check if the
cover R/L sensor
assembly comes
on and off properly
when the front
cover is opened
and closed.
Adjust the
operating position
of the cover sensor
R/L assembly.
Cover sensor
adjustment
(2) Make sure that
cables for the
cover sensor
assembly are
securely
connected.
Securely connect
the cables for the
cover sensor
assembly to
connectors J155
and J156 on the
mainboard
assembly.
Securely connect
the cover L sensor
to the cover L
cable.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Cover sensor
adjustment
1 Cover Open The front cover is
open.
(3) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check the
operation of the
transmission
photosensor for
the lever up/down
via Test:Sensor
of the self-
diagnostic
function.
Replace the
transmission
photosensor at the
lever.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(2) Make sure the
transmission
photosensor at the
lever motor has
been securely
installed.
If the
transmission
photosensor is
detached, fix it
securely.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
2 Set Paper The lever is up
(3) Check the
sensor element of
the transmission
photosensor at the
lever motor for
contamination.
Clean the sensor
element using
cotton swabs.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




267
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(4) Make sure the
transmission
photosensor
cables at the lever
motor have been
securely installed.
Securely connect
the transmission
photosensor
cables to
Mainboard
assembly
connectors J123
and J124.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(5) Check the
operation of the
foot lever via
Test:Sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Replace the foot
switch
Refer to the
Users Guide
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check he
operation of the
Test:Sensor via
the self-diagnostic
function.
If OFF is
displayed when he
paper is setup,
replace he
P_REAR sensor
assembly.
Replacing the
P_REAR_R
sensor assembly
and P_REAR_L
sensor assembly.
(2) Make sure
P_REAR sensor
assembly cables
underneath the
paper guide R are
securely
connected.
Securely connect
the cables to
Mainboard
assembly
connectors J128
and J129.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(3) The P_REAR
sensor assembly
may be damaged.
Replace the
P_REAR sensor
assembly.
Replacing the
P_REAR_R
sensor assembly
and P_REAR_L
sensor assembly.
3 Paper End The paper is not
setup
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




268
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.2.2. Message type errors
The following explains the messages, items to be confirmed and remedies to take when message type errors
occur while the product is operating.
Message type errors are displayed when trouble occurs during operation.
When message type errors occur, this product displays the following error messages on the operation panel
and stops the operation.
When the causes of errors are removed, message type errors are restored and the printing operation will be
restarted.


No. Message Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) Check the
operation of the
P_EDGE sensor
via Test:Sensor
of the self-
diagnostic
function.
If the sensor
responds to the
presence of the
paper, adjust the
sensor volume.
If the sensor
does not respond
to the presence of
the paper, replace
the P_EDGE
sensor assembly
Media sensor
sensitivity
adjustment
Replacing the
P_EDGE sensor
assembly.
(2) Make sure the
P_EDGE sensor
assembly
connector at the
cursor is securely
connected.
Securely connect
it to CR board
assembly
connector J234.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(3) Make sure the
R_REAR sensor
assembly cables
underneath paper
guide R are
securely
connected.
Securely connect
the cables to
Mainboard
assembly
connectors J128
and J129.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(4) Check the CR
tape power cables
for skewed
insertion.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors :
CR board : J201
J216
Mainboard : J137
J152
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(5) The CR tape
power cables may
be damaged.
Replace the CR
tape power cables.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and
ink tube.
1 Undefined
paper
The printer failed to
detect the media.
(6) The CR board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the
CR board
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




269
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(7) The Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
2 Paper Slant The paper is fed
askew.
(1) Reset the
paper and check if
the condition
recurs.
If this is caused
by incorrect paper
setup, explain the
correct paper
setup procedure.
-
(1) Check the
cutter grooves for
accumulated paper
dust and slip.
Remove the
accumulated paper
dust along the
direction of the
grooves.
Please refer to
the Users Guide.
(2) has the cutter
cap securely been
installed?
Reset the cutter
cap securely
Please refer to
the Users Guide.
(3) Check the
cutters up and
down sliding
operation.
If it does not rise
: Go to step (4)
If it rises : Go to
step (5)

3 Paper Cut
Error
Even though cutting
operation was
performed, the
paper was not
completely cut and
removed.
(4) Check if the
cutter drops to the
bottom end under
its own weight
when the cutter
has been installed
without the cutter
spring.
If it drops : The
cutter spring may
have a problem.
Replace the cutter
spring while
referring to the
unfolded view.
If it does not drop
: The cutter may
have a problem.
Replace the cutter.
If the cutter does
not drop after
replaced, replace
the cutter holder.
Replacing the
cutter holder,
cutter spring,
cutter cap,
solenoid
assembly and
solenoid spring.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




270
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(5) Check the up
and down
operation of the
solenoid via
Life/Cutter of the
self-diagnostic
function.
a) The solenoid
moves up and
down : Check the
cutters down
position relative to
the cutter groove.
b) It does not
move up and
down.
OK :
The cutters
service life is
reached or it is
damaged.
Replace the cutter.
NG :
Adjust the position
of the cutter
holder.
The connectors
may have poor
contacts.
Check the
connections of the
following
connectors :
CR board : J235
CR board : J201
J216
Mainboard : J137
J152
Please refer to
the Users Guide
Cutter
adjustment
Replacing the
CR board
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(6) Open CR
cable, faulty
solenoid assembly,
faulty board
assembly, etc.,
may be the cause.
Replace the CR
tape power cables.
Replace the
solenoid assembly
Replace the CR
board assembly
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and
ink tube.
Replacing the
cutter holder,
cutter spring,
cutter cap,
solenoid
assembly and
solenoid spring
Replacing the
CR board
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
4 End of Roll Displayed when the
end of the roll paper
is detected during
the use of roll paper.
This is released
when the lever has
(1) Check if the
message is still
displayed after
turning the power
off and then back
on again.
If the message is
displayed : go to
step (2)

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




271
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Check the
P_REAR sensor
assembly for the
contact condition.
Redo the
connections of
Mainboard
assembly
connectors J128
and J129. If the
paper is not
initialized, the
sensor may be
damaged.
Replace the
P_REAR sensor
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Replacing the
P_REAR_R
sensor assembly
and P_REAR_L
sensor assembly.
been set to the up
position.
(3) The Mainboard
may be damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check the ink
end via Test:
Sensor of the self-
diagnostic
function.
Operate the lever
at the end
detecting element
of the ink sensor
assembly to check
if the ink end
indication
changes. (At this
time, the sensor
for detecting the
presence of
cartridges is set to
Yes.)
If there is no
response, replace
the ink sensor
assembly.
Sensor menu
Replacing the
I/H (ink holder)
assembly
5




6
[ ] Near End




[ ] Ink End
The remaining
amount of ink is low.
Printing is still
possible.

There is no more ink
left. Printing in
progress is
interrupted
immediately.
(2) Check the ink
sensor connector
for the contact
conditions.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Junction board :
J401 J418
Mainboard : J133
J134
Replacing the
Junction board
assembly.
7 Not Original
Ink
(1) Check the ink
end ID via Test:
Sensor of the self-
diagnostic
function. (This is
limited to when
smart chips are
set.)
If the type of the
installed cartridge
does not match the
displayed type, the
ink ID sensor may
be damaged.
Sensor menu
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




272
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Check the ink
ID sensor
connector for the
contact conditions.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors :
Junction board :
J401 J418
Mainboard : J133
J134
Replacing the
JUNCTION board
assembly.
(3) The Mainboard
may be damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check if the
message is still
displayed after
turning the power
off and then back
on again.
When a message
is displayed : Go to
step (2)
-
(2) The amount of
waste ink inside
the tank reached
the specified level.
Dispose of the
waste ink in the
waste bottle.
-
8 Warning
Waste INK
Tank
The waste tank will
soon be full.
(3) If initialization
does take effect
when the waste ink
is disposed of and
waste ink history is
initialized, the
Mainboard may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check if the
message is still
displayed after
turning the power
off and then back
on again.
When a message
is displayed : Go to
step (2)
-
(2) The number of
times the ink tube
was used reached
the maximum
allowable times.
Replace the ink
tube.
Initializing CR
motor history.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and
ink tube.
9 Warning
Waste INK
Tank
The service life of
the ink tube will
soon be reached.
(3) If initialization
does take effect
when the CR
motor history is
initialized after the
ink tube is
replaced, the
Mainboard may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




273
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Check if the
message is still
displayed after
turning the power
off and then back
on again.
When a message
is displayed : refer
to step (2)

(2) The number of
times the print
head was used
reached the
maximum
allowable times.
Replace the print
head assembly.
Initialize the head
unit.
Replacing the
print head
assembly and
head tape power
cable.
Counter
initialization
menu.
10 (Warning
Head Life)
The service life of
the print head will
soon be reached.
(3) If initialization
does not take
effect when the
head unit is
initialized, the
Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.

Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly
(1) Check the
connections of
connectors.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard : J102
power source
board (small)
assembly : CN51
CN52
(2) The
HDD_MOTHER
board assembly
may be damaged.
Replace the ink
tube.
Initializing CR
motor history.
(3) Hard disk may
be damaged.
Replace the hard
disks.
11 Hard disk
status connect
error
There is a problem
in the hard disk
connections.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Replacing the
power source
board assembly.
(1) The
PCI_LINUX board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
PCI_LINUX board
assembly.
12 Network
initialize error
There is a problem
in the network
board.
(2) The Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check if the
waste bottle has
been installed.
Install the waste
bottle correctly.
- 13 Waste ink tank
sts. No
The waste tank is
not installed.
(2) Check the
operation of the
waste box sensor
assembly via
Sensor/Waste
Bin of the self-
diagnostic
function.
Replace the
waste box sensor
assembly.
-
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




274
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(3) Check the
connections of the
connectors.
Check if the
waste box sensor
connectors are
connected to the
rear side cap R.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard : J120
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.


Notes :

The number between brackets [ ] on the error display indicates the cartridge
number.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




275
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.2.3. Heating system error
The following explains the messages, items to be confirmed and remedies to take when errors handling
heating system occur while the product is operating.
Heating system errors are displayed when communication trouble occurs between the heater strips and this
product.
If heating system error occurs, the following error messages are displayed and the printer stops.
Solve the problem to delete the error message and restart the printer.

No Message Check point Action
1 AC not present AC connector. Check AC connector
2 Error sensors A Sensors A Check if the sensors are connected properly.
3 Error sensor A Sensor A Check if the sensors are connected properly.
4 Conn. err. Left A Sensor A Check if the left sensor is connected properly.
5 Conn. err. Right A Sensor A Check if the right sensor is connected properly.
6 Error sensors D1 Sensors D1 Check if the sensors are connected properly.
7 Error sensor D1 Sensor D1 Check if the sensors are connected properly.
8 Conn. err. Left D1 Sensor D1 Check if the left sensor is connected properly.
9 Conn. err. Right D1 Sensor D1 Check if the right sensor is connected properly.
10 Error sensors D2 Sensors D2 Check if the sensors are connected properly.
11 Error sensor D2 Sensor D2 Check if the sensors are connected properly.
12 Conn. err. Left D2 Sensor D2 Check if the left sensor is connected properly.
13 Conn. err. Right D2 Sensor D2 Check if the right sensor is connected properly.
14 Couldn't reach temp Heater strip After 10 minutes, temperature is not reached. Check
the heater strips.
15 Err: Temp > 85C! Heater strip Temperature comes higher then the limit. Check the
heater strips.
16 Connection err. A Rear Heater (A) Check the connector of the rear heater.
17 Connection err. D1 Dryer (D1) Check the connector of the front heater (D1).
18 Connection err. D2 Dryer (D2) Check the connector of the front heater (D2).
19 Error sensor B1 Fixer (B1) Check the sensor of the fixer 1 (B1).
20 Error sensor C Post fixer (C) Check the sensor of the fixer (C).
21 Connection err. B1 Fixer (B1) Check the connector of the fixer 1 (B1).
22 Connection err. C Post fixer (C) Check the connector of the post fixer (c).
23 Error sensor B2 Fixer (B2) Check the sensor of the fixer 2 (B2)
24 Connection err. B2 Fixer (B2) Check the connector of the fixer 2 (B2).
25 Error D group Heaters D Temperature difference higher than 15C between
the sensors of the D heaters.
26 Error A group Heaters A Temperature difference higher then 15C between
the sensors of the A heaters.
27 Error B group Heaters B Temperature difference higher then 15C between
the sensors of the B heaters.


Important :

Before checking the connectors, please power off the unit and remove the power cable.



Notes :

Check if the connectors are properly connected to the power board.
Check if the sensors are connected onto the right connector.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




276
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.2.4. Data error
The following explains the messages, items to be confirmed and remedies to take when data errors occur
while the product is operating.
Data errors are displayed when data communication trouble occurs between the computer and this product.
If data error display occurs, the following error messages are displayed and the printer stops.
Solve the problem to delete the error message and restart the printer.

No. Message Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
1 I 15-1 error
command [ ]
Online frame error
2 I 15-2 error
command [ ]
Overrun error
3 I 15-3 error
command [ ]
Online parity error
4 I 15-4 error
command [ ]
Sum check error
5 I 15-5 error
command [ ]
ESC parameter
6 I 15-6 error
command [ ]
Undefined ESC
7 I 15-7 error
command [ ]
Incorrect letters
ESC
8 I 15-8 error
command [ ]
Numeral character
ESC
9 I 15-9 error
command [ ]
Parameter error
ESC
10 I 15-10 error
command [ ]
Buffer overflow
(1) Check the
printing data for
contents that may
be judges as an
error.

(2) Mainboard
assembly may be
defective?
Try a different
drive for the
application.
Replace
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.


Notes :

The command codes for errors may be indicated between brackets [ ].





Spitfire Maintenance Manual




277
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.2.5. Command errors
The following explains the messages, items to be confirmed and remedies to take when command errors
occur while the product is operating.
Command errors are displayed when trouble occurs during analysis of the command data that is sent to this
product from the computer.
If a command error occurs, the following error messages are displayed and the printer stops.
Solve the problem to delete the error message and restart the printer.

No. Message Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
1 MH01 error
command [ ]
Undefined ESC: A
command that has
not been defined in
command modes
was analyzed.
2 MH02 error
command [ ]
Parameter error :
Number of
parameters
following command
is incorrect.
3 MHO3 error
command [ ]
Numeric error :
Number of
parameters
following command
is incorrect.
4 MH04 error
command [ ]
Undefined letter set:
Letter sets that
should not exist (do
exist).
5 MH05 error
command [ ]
Buffer overflow:
Polygon buffer or
downloadable
character buffer
overflows.
(1) Check the
printing data for
contents that may
be judged as an
error.
(2) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Try a different
drive for the
application
Replace
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.


Notes :

The command codes for errors may be indicated between brackets [ ].

For the settings on a computer, refer to the computer's operation manual.



Spitfire Maintenance Manual




278
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.2.6. Errors requiring restart
The following explains the messages, items to be confirmed and remedies to take when errors requiring
restart occur while the product is operating.
Errors requiring restart are displayed when trouble critical to the operation of this product occurs.
Foreign material disturbing the printer operation has been loaded in the printer.
An electrical circuit (such as board, motor or sensor) failure has occurred.
An error on control program of the printer has occurred.
When errors requiring restart occur.
The product stops operation after the following actions take place.

1. The power supply to the operation has been automatically shut-off.

2. All lamps on the operation panel flash and the buzzer sounds intermittently.

3. Error messages are displayed on the operation panel.

If an error requiring a restart has occurred, solve the problems to restart the printer and delete the error.

(1) CPU system critical errors

No. Message Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
1 E 001 error
DRAM
Standard DRAM
error : Abnormal
condition in
standard memory
mounted on
Mainboard
assembly
(1) Mainboard
assembly may be
defective.
Replace
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) If foreign
material is present
in the slot (J103) of
the extended
memory, errors
may result.
Remove dust
using a tool such
as air duster, then
reinstall the
memory.
(2) Install known
good optional
memory (the
capacity must be
equal to the one in
the users unit)
then check the
equipped memory
capacity via
Test:Ram
Capacity of the
self-diagnostic
function.
Replace memory.
2 E 002 error
Opt. DRAM
Option DRAM error :
Abnormal condition
in optional memory
mounted on
Mainboard
assembly
(3) Mainboard
assembly may be
defective.
Replace
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




279
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

3 E 016 error
CPU Err [00]
Interruption
exception error:
Trouble occurred in
the interrupt process
4 E 016 error
CPU Err [02]
Command boundary
exception errors:
Trouble occurred in
the command
boundary.
5 E 016 error
CPU Err [03]
Data boundary
exception errors :
Trouble occurred in
the data boundary.
6 E 016 error
CPU Err [04]
Address exception
error (load or
command fetch):
Address error
occurred while
loading or fetching
commands.
7 E 016 error
CPU Err [05]
Address exception
error (store) :
Address errors
occurred while
saving.
8 E 016 error
CPU Err [06]
Address exception
error (command
fetch): Address
errors occurred
while loading or
storing commands
9 E 016 error
CPU Err [07]
Bus exception
errors (Loading and
storing): buss errors
occurred while
loading and storing
commands
10 E 016 error
CPU Err [08]
System call
exception errors:
System call trouble
occurred.
11 E 016 error
CPU Err [09]
Break point
exception error:
trouble occurred in
the break points.
12 E 016 error
CPU Err [10]
Reservation
command exception
errors: trouble
occurred in the
reservation
commands.
13 E 016 error
CPU Err [03]
Disable co-
processor exception
errors: trouble
occurred in the co-
processor.
14 E 016 error
CPU Err [12]
Calculation overflow
exception errors:
overflows occurred.
(1) Check the AC
power source and
the printer
peripheral
devices(2) Check if
the error recurs. If
not, check by
powering-up the
product several
times.
(3) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




280
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

15 E 016 error
CPU Err [13]
Trap exception
errors : trap
occurred
16 E 016 error
CPU Err [15]
Floating point
exception error :
trouble occurred in
the floating points
17 E 016 error
CPU Err [22]
Watch exception
error : trouble
occurred in the
watch.
18 E 016 error
CPU Err [32]
Watch dog timeout
exception error :
watch dog time out
occurred.
19 E 016 error
CPU Err [33]
Abort error : Aborts
occurred


Notes :

For the settings on a computer, refer to the computer's operation manual.



(2) Mechanical system critical errors

No. Message Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
1 E065 error PF
motor
Trouble occurred in
the PF motor (X-
axis) during
operation.
Displayed when the
motor commended
value and feedback
from the encoder
are significantly
different.
(1) Check error
history from Test:
history of self-
diagnosis function.
History menu
2 E067 error
Paper feed
encoder
Trouble occurred on
paper travel (x-axis)
during operation.
Displayed when
there is no feedback
from the encoder.
(2) Set endurance
running cycles to
50 or more from
Life: PF motor of
self-diagnosis
function and check
if X-axis motor
error is issued.
Check
connection of
following
connectors in
Mainboard
assembly:
PF motor cable
assembly
connector J157
PF_ENC
assembly
connector J154
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
3 E069 error
Paper feed
timeout
Timeout occurred
on paper travel (X-
axis) during
operation.
Displayed when the
pressure roller has
not reached the
commanded
position.
(3) Check
Encoder:PF
under Test:
Encoder of self-
diagnosis function.
Encoder Menu
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




281
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

4 E071 error PF
over current
An overload
occurred in the PF
motor (X-axis)
during operation.
(4) PF motor
assembly may be
damaged.
(5) Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace PF
motor assembly
Replace
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing PF
Motor Assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
5 E 066 Error
CR Motor
Trouble occurred in
the CF motor (Y-
axis) during
operation.
Displayed when the
motor commanded
value and feedback
from the encoder
are significantly
different.
(1) Check the
trouble history via
Test: Record of
the self-diagnostic
function
- History Menu
6 E 068 Error
CR Encoder
Trouble occurred in
the head travel (Y-
axis) during
operation.
Displayed when
there is no feedback
from the encoder.
(2) With the power
supply off, move
the carriage side to
side to check for
jamming.

Refer to Error
E072
Clean and
lubricate the rollers
of the CR rail.
Lubrication /
Bonding
7 E 070 Error
CR Timeout
Err
Time out occurred in
the head travel (Y-
axis) during
operation.
Displayed when he
carriage has not
reached the
commanded
position.
(3) Check if CR
Motor Error
occurs by setting
the durability
cycles at 50 over
larger via Life: CR
Motor of the self-
diagnostic
function.
Check he
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard
assembly
CR motor
assembly
connector : J158
CR tape power
cable connectors :
J137 J152
CR Board
assembly
CR tape power
cable connectors :
J201 J216
CR_ENC
assembly
connector : J233
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




282
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(4) Check the T-
fence for
contamination,
flows and bends.
If contaminated
with grease and
dust, wipe off with
a dry cloth.
If contaminated
with ink, wipe off
with a lightly damp
cloth and then with
a dry cloth.
If contamination
is severe, replace
the T fence.
a) If NG :
Check the cable
connections at the
following locations
CR board
assembly
connector J233
b) Replace the
following parts
T fence
CR motor
assembly
CR BASE board
assembly
CR tape power
cables
Replacing the
T fence
(5) Check the
Encoders via
Test/Encoder of
the self-diagnostic
functions.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly
Make sure that the
connections of the
Mainboard
assembly
connector J155 /
J156 are good and
check the
operation of the
cover sensor via
Test/Sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Replacing the
CR motor
assembly.
Replacing the
CR board
assembly
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and
ink tube.
8 E 072 Error
CR Over
Current
An overload
occurred in the CR
motor (Y-axis)
during operation.
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.

Error E068
occurs if
Mainboard
assembly
connector
J155/COVER-R or
J156/COVER-L is
not connected.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Make sure that
the connections of
the Mainboard
assembly
connector J155 /
J156 are good and
check the
operation of the
cover sensor via
Test: sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




283
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Check the
transmission
photosensor for
CR home position
detection via Test:
Sensor of the self-
diagnostic
function.
Check the
connections of the
transmission
photosensor for
CR home position
detection.
Sensor Menu
(2) The
transmission
photosensor for
CR home position
detection may be
damaged.
Replace the
transmission
photosensor for
the CR home
position detection.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
9 E 073 Error
CR Origin
CR_HP cannot be
detected.
(3) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check the
cover sensor via
Test/Sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Make sure that
the connection of
the cover sensor
assembly is good.
Mainboard : J155
J156
Sensor Menu
(2) The cover
sensor assembly
may be damaged.
Replace the
cover sensor
assembly.
Replace the
cover R sensor
assembly and the
cover L sensor
assembly.
10 E 074 Error
Cover
Trouble occurred in
the cover sensor.
(3) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Make sure that
the connections of
the head tape
power cables are
good.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
CR board : J217
J232
Reset the head
error
Replacing the
CR board
assembly.
Counter
initialization menu
11 E 075 Error
Head Over
Current
Trouble occurred
during printer
operation due to an
overload of the print
head.
(2) Make sure that
the connections of
the CR tape power
cables are good.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
CR board : J201
J216
Reset the head
error
Replacing the
CR board
assembly
Counter
initialization menu
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




284
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(3) The print head
may be damaged.
Replace the print
head assembly
Replacing the
print head
assembly and
head tape power
cable.
Counter
initialization menu
(4) The CR board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the CR
board assembly
Reset the head
error
Replacing the
CR board
assembly
Counter
initialization menu
(5) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly
Reset the head
error
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Counter
initialization menu
(1) Check the
HD_SLIDE sensor
via
Sensor/HD_SLID
E of the self-
diagnostic function
Make sure that
the connections of
the HD_SLIDE
sensor assembly
connectors are
good.
Mainboard : J127
Sensor Menu
(2) Make sure that
the connections of
the HD_SLIDE
sensor assembly
connectors are
good.
Replace the
HD_SLIDE sensor
assembly.
Replacing the
SLIDE motor
assembly,
HD_SLIDE
sensor assembly
and slide motor
installation board.
(3) The SLIDE
motor assembly
may be damaged.
Replace the
SLIDE motor
assembly.
Replacing the
SLIDE motor
assembly,
HD_SLIDE
sensor assembly
and slide motor
installation board.
12 E 076 Error
PG CR origin
The HD_SLIDE
home position
cannot be detected.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




285
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) The
HEAD_DRV board
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
HEDA_DRV board
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
13 E 077 Error
Head
Overheat
Trouble occurred in
the head driver.
(2) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Make sure that
the connections of
the head tape
power cables are
good.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
CR board : J217
J232
Replacing the
CR board
assembly
(2) Make sure that
the connections of
the CR tape power
cables are good.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
CR board : J201-
J216
Replacing the
CR board
assembly
(3) The print head
assembly may be
damaged
Replace the print
head assembly.
Replacing the
print head
assembly and
head tape power
cable.
Counter
initialization menu
(4) The CR board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the
CR board
assembly
14 E 078 Error
Head Cable
Trouble occurred in
the head cable or
head thermister.
(5) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
15 E 079 Error
Lever Over
Current
An overload
occurred in the lever
motor during
operation.
(1) The lever motor
may be damaged.
Replace the lever
motor.
Replacing the
lever motor
assembly and the
arm motor
installation board.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




286
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check the
operation of the
transmission
photosensor for
the lever up/ down
via Check: sensor
of the self-
diagnostic
function.
Replace the
transmission
photosensor at the
lever.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(2) Is the
transmission
photosensor at the
lever motor
securely installed?
If the
transmission
photosensor is
detached, fix it
securely.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(3) Is the sensor
element of the
transmission
photosensor at the
lever motor
contaminated?
Clean the sensor
element using
cotton swabs.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(4) Is the
transmission
photosensor cable
at the lever motor
securely installed?
Securely connect
the cable for the
transmission
photosensor cable
to Mainboard
assembly
connectors J123
and J124.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
16 E 080 Error
Lever Sensor
Trouble occurred in
the lever sensor.
(5) The Mainboard
assembly may
have a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Counter
Initialization
Menu.
17 E 081 Error
Cap Sensor.
Trouble occurred in
the cap sensor.
(1) Check the
operation of the
transmission
photosensor at the
cap via Sensor:
Head Lock of the
self-diagnostic
function.
Replace the
transmission
photosensor at the
cap.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




287
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Is the
transmission
photosensor at the
cap securely
installed?
If the
transmission
photosensor is
detached, fix it
securely.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(3) Is the sensor
element of the
transmission
photosensor at the
cap contaminated?
Clean the sensor
element using
cotton swabs.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(4) Is the
transmission
photosensor cable
at the lever motor
securely installed?
Securely connect
the cable for the
transmission
photosensor cable
to Mainboard
assembly
connectors J123
and J124.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(5) Make sure that
the connections of
the SLIDE motor
assembly for
maintenance U/D
are good.
Replace the
SLIDE motor
assembly for the
maintenance U/D.
Replacing the
SLIDE motor
assembly (wiper
arm).
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check the
up/down operation
of he cap (wiper)
via Sensor: Head
Lock of the self-
diagnostic
function.
Replace the
transmission
photosensor at the
wiper.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(2) Is the
transmission
photosensor at the
wiper up/down
area securely
installed?
If the
transmission
photosensor is
detached, fix it
securely.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(3) Is the sensor
element of the
transmission
photosensor
contaminated?
Clean the sensor
element using
cotton swabs.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
18 E 082 Error
Wiper Sensor
Trouble occurred in
the wiper sensor.
(4) Is the
transmission
photosensor cable
securely
connected?
Securely connect
the cable for the
transmission
photosensor cable
to Mainboard
assembly
connector J131.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




288
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(5) Make sure that
the connections of
the SLIDE motor
assembly for the
WIPER slide are
good.
Replace the
SLIDE motor
assembly for the
wiper SLIDE.
Replacing the
SLIDE motor
assembly (wiper
arm).
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV
board assembly
and cooling fan
assembly.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




289
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.3. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WHEN ERRORS ARE
NOT DISPLAYED
The following explains the messages, items to be confirmed and remedies to take when error messages are
not displayed


9.3.1. Problems relating to initial operation
This chapter explains the messages displayed, the items to be confirmed and the remedy.

No. Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) Check the panel
unit assembly
cables for open or
shorted conditions.
Replace the panel
cables.
Removing the
panel unit assembly.
(2) Make sure that
the connections of
the power supply
board and
Mainboard
assembly are good.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard : J101
power source
board : CN2/CN4
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(3) Make sure that
the connections of
the inlet board
assembly are good.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Inlet board : CN1-
CN3
Replacing the
inlet assembly, inlet
board assembly and
lever foot SW cable
assembly.
(4) The panel board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the panel
board assembly.
Removing the
panel unit assembly.
(5) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
1 Power is not supplied.
(6) The power
supply board
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the power
supply board
assembly.1
Replacing the
power source board
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




290
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Check if the
DIMM (optional
memory) is
installed.
The internal
programs cannot be
started without the
DIMM installed in
the product. Make
sure to install the
one in the
specifications. If not
installed, nothing
will be displayed on
the LCD and all
LEDs will flash.
Users Guide
(2) Make sure that
the connections of
the panel cable
connectors at the
panel side and the
Mainboard
assembly side is
good.
Check the panel
cables for skewed
insertion.
Make sure that
they are securely
locked.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard : J109
Panel board : J301
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
Removing the panel
unit assembly.
(3) The DIMM
(optional memory)
may be damaged.
Replace the DIMM
(optional memory)
Users Guide
(4) The panel cables
may be damaged.
Replace the panel
cables.
Removing the
panel unit assembly.
(5) Check the panel
unit assembly LCD
for damages.
Replace the panel
board assembly.
Removing the
panel unit assy.
2 LCD failure (no display / garbled
display)
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
3 Ink replenishment cannot be
performed.
(1) Check if Cover
Open is displayed
on the LCD when
the front cover is
closed.
Adjust the cover
sensor.
Cover sensor
adjustment.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




291
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Make sure that
the connections of
the panel cable
connectors at the
panel unit assembly
side and the
Mainboard
assembly side is
good.
Check the panel
cables for skewed
insertion.
Make sure that
they are securely
locked.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard : J105
Panel board : J301
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(3) Check if
LeverUp is
displayed on the
LCD when the
pressure arm is at
the lower position.
Replace the
transmission
photosensor at the
lever.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(4) The ink ID board
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the ink ID
board assembly.
Replacing the I.H
(ink holder)
assembly
(5) The JUNCTION
board assembly
may be damaged.
Replace the
JUNCTION board
assembly.
Replacing the
JUNCTION board
assembly.
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(1) The ink pump
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the ink
pump assembly.
Replacing the
pump assembly.
(2) The
maintenance parts
may be damaged.
Replace the
maintenance
assembly.
Replacing the
maintenance
assembly.
(3) The damper may
be damaged.
Replace the
damper.
Replacing the H
ink tube, tube
branch and damper
assembly.
(4) The ink tube
may be damaged.
Replace the ink
tube.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
4 Although ink replenishment has
started, the ink has not reached
the head.
(5) The cartridge
frame may be
damaged.
Replace the
cartridge frame
assembly.
Replacing the I/H
(ink holder)
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




292
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Make sure that
the connections of
the head cable
connectors at the
CR board assembly
side and the print
head side is good.
Check the head
cables for open
conditions.
Make sure that
they are securely
connected.
Redo the
connections of the
head cables to the
connectors.
Replacing the CR
board assembly.
(2) Check the head
cables for the open
conditions.
Replace the head
cables.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(3) The print head
may be damaged.
Replace the print
head assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(4) Check the CR
cables for open
conditions.
Replace the CR
tape power cables.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(5) The HEAD_DRV
board assembly
may have a
problem.
Replace the
HEAD_DRV board
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
5 Ink is not supplied when ink
replenishment is complete.
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem
Replace the
Mainboard .
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
6 Operation does not take place at
all after the power is supplied.
7 When power is supplied,
Initialize is displayed, then
reset.
8 Initialization does not take place
even if the paper is set.
9 Operation does not take place
even if the front cover is closed.
(1) Check if Cover
Open is displayed
on the LCD when
the front cover is
closed.
Check the proper
operation of the
cover sensory
assembly via
TEST: Sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Adjust the cover
sensor.
Redo the
connections of
connectors J155
and J156 on the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replace he cover
sensor assembly.
Cover sensor
adjustment
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
Replace the cover R
sensor assembly
and the cover L
sensor assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




293
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Panel unit Make
sure that the
connections of the
panel cable
connectors at the
assembly side and
the Mainboard
assembly side are
good.
Check the panel
cables for skewed
insertion.
Make sure that
they are securely
locked.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard : J105
Panel unit : J301
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(3) Check if Set
Paper is displayed
on the LCD when
the pressure arm is
at the lower
position.
Redo the
connections of
Mainboard
assembly
connectors J123
and J124.
Replace the
transmission
photosensor at the
lever.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
Replacing the
transmission
photosensor.
(4) Check if the
detection function of
the P_REAR sensor
assembly is proper
via Test: Sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Redo the
connections of
Mainboard
assembly
connectors J128
and J129.
Replace the
P_REAR sensor
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
Replacing the
P_REAR_R sensor
and P_REAR_L
sensor assembly
10 Operation does not stop even if
the front cover is opened.
(5) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
11 Key inputs via operation panel
are disabled.
(1) Check the
operation panel
cover for breakage
and contamination.
Replace the
operation panel
cover.
-
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




294
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Make sure that
the connections of
the panel cable
connectors at the
panel unit assembly
side and the
Mainboard
assembly side is
good.
Check the panel
cables for skewed
insertion.
Make sure that
they are securely
locked.
Check the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard : J105
Panel board : J301
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(3) The panel unit
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the panel
board assembly.
Removing the
panel unit assembly.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
12 Printing does not start even if
data is received.
(1) Refer to
Problems relating
to online and
functions.
- Problems relating
to online and
functions.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




295
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.3.2. Problems relating to paper feed

No. Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
1 The paper comes off at paper
set initialization or during the
printing operation.
(1) Check if the
P_REAR sensor
assembly and
P_EDGE sensor
assembly are
operating correctly
via Test: Sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function
Check if the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Mainboard
assembly :
J128/J129, J137-
J152
CR board : J201-
J261
Adjust the
sensitivity of the
P_EDGE sensor
Replace the
P_REAR sensor
assembly and
P_EDGE sensor
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
Replacing the CR
board assembly
media sensor
sensitivity
adjustment
Replacing the
P_REAR_R sensor
and P_REAR_L
sensor assembly
Replacing the
P_EDGE sensor
assembly.
2 The paper is fed askew or
meanderingly at paper set
initialization or during the
printing operation.
(2) Check the platen
for contamination by
paper dust and ink.
If the platen is
contaminated by ink
or paper dust, wipe
off with a damped
soft cloth.
Users Guide
3 The paper is wrinkled at paper
set initialization or during the
printing operation.
(3) Check the
rotation of pressure
roller with the
pressure arm at the
raised position.
If the surrounding
area of the pressure
roller is
contaminated by
paper dust and
waste paper, wipe
off with a damped
soft cloth.
Users Guide
4 The paper jams up at paper set
initialization or during the
printing operation.
(4) Check paper
guide F for
significant
deformation, flaws,
foreign material, etc.
If foreign materials
such as wastepaper
are found on the
paper guide F,
remove them.
Replace the paper
guide F.
Removing media
guide F.
5 After the paper set initialization,
the paper size is detected
incorrectly.
(5) Is the flange
properly installed?
Securely insert
flanges into the
paper tube for the
roll paper.
Users Guide
(6) Check the rollers
of the paper
receiver for flaws
and wear that may
hinder the rotation
of the scroller.
Replace the rollers
of the scroller.
Replacing the
scroller R assembly.
Replacing the
scroller L assembly.
(7) Check the
scrollers for bends.
Replace the
scrollers.
Users Guide


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




296
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.3.3. Problems relating to the printing operation

No. Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) The program
ROM may have
failed.
Upgrade the
firmware version.
Firmware
installation.
1 Continuous printing cannot be
performed.
(2) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check if the
detection function of
the P_REAR sensor
assembly is correct
via Test: Sensor of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Make sure that the
connections of
Mainboard
assembly
connectors J128
J129 are good.
Replace the
P_REAR sensor
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
Replacing the
P_REAR_R sensor
assembly and
P_REAR_L sensor
assembly.
(2) Check
adjustments of the
top & bottom and
rear sensor
positions.
Adjust the
positions of the top
& bottom and rear
sensors.
Top & bottom
adjustment menu.
P_REAR sensor
position adjustment
menu.
(3) The program
ROM may have
failed.
Upgrade the
firmware version.
Firmware
installation
2 Give an extra feed after the
printing operation has been
completed.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Perform the
printing operation
via Print: Nozzle
Check or Test:
Print of the self-
diagnostic function.
When the nozzle
check pattern is not
printed correctly : go
to step 2
Test printing
menu
3 Dots are missed in printing
(2) Repeat head
cleaning several
times.
If the condition is
not restored by
performing the
cleaning operation,
leave the product for
several hours then
recheck it.
Users Guide
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




297
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Check the use
conditions of the
product.
Under low
humidity conditions
in particular, printing
is performed poorly.
Check the
conditions under the
guaranteed
operation
conditions.
Specifications
(2) Check if the
conditions occur
after ink
replenishment.
Printing
performance is not
stable immediately
after ink
replenishment.
Leave the product
for several hours
then recheck it.
-
(3) Check the
cleaning wipers for
contamination.
Using the provided
cleaning cloth for
cleaning the wipers,
slightly dampen with
cleaning liquid it and
wipe the surface of
the cleaning wipers,
then recheck their
condition by
performing the
cleaning operation.
If the ink is solid
and does not come
off by wiping,
replace the wiper.
Users Guide
Replacing the
cleaner
(4) Check the
installation
conditions of the
cleaning wipers.
Check the
installation
conditions of the
wipers and fix them
securely.
Replacing the
cleaner.
(5) Check if the QR
codes are input
correctly.
Input the correct
QR codes.
Head rank input
menu.
(6) The damper may
be damaged.
Replace the
damaged damper.
Replacing the H
ink tube, tube
branch and damper
assembly.
(7) The print head
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
damaged print head
assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(8) Check if the
remaining amount of
ink in the cartridge
is sufficient.
If Near End or
Ink End is not
displayed when the
remaining amount of
ink is insufficient,
the ink sensor
assembly may have
a problem.
Replacing the I/H
(ink holder)
assembly.
4 Cleaning does not fix problems
such as clogging or split nozzle.
(9) The ink pump
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the ink
pump assembly.
Replacing the
pump assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




298
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(10) The
maintenance
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
maintenance
assembly.
Replacing the
maintenance
assembly
(11) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
5 Nothing has been printed (1) Check the head
and CR cables for
skewed insertion.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Connectors for the
print head.
CR board : J201
J232
Mainboard : J137
J152
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
Replacing the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(2) The head and
CR cables may be
damaged.
Replace the CR
tape power cables.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(3) Check ink tubes
for bends, flaws, air
leaks, etc.
Replace the
damaged ink tubes.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(4) The print head
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the print
head assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(5) The damper may
be damaged.
Replace the
damaged cable.
Replacing the H
ink tube, tube
branch and damper
assembly.
(6) The ink pump
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the ink
pump assembly.
Replacing the
pump assembly.
(7) The
maintenance
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
maintenance
assembly.
Replacing the
maintenance
assembly.
(8) The CR board
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the CR
board assembly
6 Only specific colours are not
printed.
(9) The HEAD_DRV
board may be
damaged.
Replace the
HEAD_DRV board.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




299
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(10) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly.
(1) Check the head
and CR cables for
skewed insertion.
Redo the
connections of the
following
connectors.
Connectors for the
print head.
CR board : J201
J232
Mainboard : J137 -
J152
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
(2) The head and
CR cables may be
damaged.
Replace the CR
tape power cables.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
bearing, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(3) The print head
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the print
head assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(4) The CR board
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the CR
board assembly.
(5) The HEAD_DRV
assembly board
may be damaged.
Replace the
HEAD_DRV
assembly board
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
7 Drawn black on a full screen (Or
other specified colour)
(6) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
8 Light and slade printing occurs. (1) Check if the use
conditions are within
the normal
operation
conditions.
Be sure to use the
product under the
guaranteed
operation
conditions.
-
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




300
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(2) Check if printing
began immediately
after ink
replenishment.
The following
phenomena may
occur for the first
printing that is
processed
immediately after
ink replenishment.
Faint lines are
drawn.
White streaks
appear on the
printing.
If these conditions
are observed,
perform cleaning a
couple of times
before printing, then
check the result.
If cleaning does
not improve the
result, leave the
products for at least
several hours, redo
the cleaning
operation, then
check the results
again.
Users Guide
9 Irregularities occur in the image
picture.
(3) Check the band
feed adjustments.
Adjust the band
feed.
Band feed
correction menu
10 The lines in the CR direction
split.
(4) Check the head
adjustments.
Adjust the head. Head precision
adjustment
(5) Check if the
suction fans are
operating correctly
via Test: Fan of
the self-diagnostic
function.
Check the
connections of the
following
connections.
Mainboard : J111-
J116
Replacing the
suction fan
assembly.
(6) If the paper in
concern is roll
paper, check if the
scroller is rotating
smoothly.
Make sure the
scroller receivers
are installed in the
correct position.
Replace the rollers
of the scroller.
Replacing the
scroller R assembly.
Replacing the
scroller L assembly.
(7) Make sure hat
the PF belt tension
is adjusted correctly.
Adjust the tension
of the PF reduction
belt.
PF deceleration
belt tension
adjustment.
(8) Check if the
pump is running
during the cleaning
operation.
Check that the
connections of
Mainboard
connectors J160-
J161 are good.
Replace the pump
motor.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
Replacing the
pump motor
assembly.
11 Black or white streaks occur in
printings.
(9) Check if he
nozzle face is wiped
correctly.
Using the wiper,
wipe the nozzle face
well.
Users Guide
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




301
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(10) Check the
cleaning wipers for
contamination.
Using the provided
cleaning cloth for
cleaning the wipers,
slightly dampen it
with cleaning liquid
and wipe the
surface of the
cleaning wipers,
then recheck their
condition by
performing the
cleaning operation.
If the ink is solid
and does not come
off by wiping,
replace the wiper.
Users Guide
Replacing the
cleaner
(11) Check the T
fence for
contamination
Clean the T fence.
If contamination
cannot be cleaned
up, replace the T
fence
Replacing the
fence
(12) Check the
rotation of the
pressure roller with
the pressure arm at
the raised position.
If the surrounding
area of the pressure
roller is
contaminated by
paper dust and
waste paper, wipe it
with a soft
dampened cloth.
Users Guide
(13) Check if the QR
code is input
correctly.
Input the correct
QR codes.
Head rank input
menu
(14) The head
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
damaged head
assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(15) The ink tube
may be damaged.
Replace the ink
tube.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(16) The CR board
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(17) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




302
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Check if the
condition is
recovered by
cleaning.
If the condition is
not recovered by
performing the
cleaning operation a
couple of times,
leave the product for
a while then recheck
it.
Users Guide
(2) Check if the set
paper is one of
those recommended
by MUTOH.
Reset the
recommended
paper and recheck
the condition. If
paper not
recommended by
MUTOH is used, the
paper may not be
recognized correctly
by the paper sensor.
Check the
condition using the
printing mode that is
recommended for
the paper.
Users Guide
(3) Check the head
adjustments.
Adjust the head. Head precision
adjustment
(4) Check if the QR
code is input
correctly.
Input the correct
QR codes.
Head rank input
menu
(5) The CR cables
may be damaged.
Replace the CR
tape power cables.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(6) Check the head
assembly for
breakage.
Replace the
damaged head
assembly
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(7) The CR board
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the CR
board assembly
12 The printing boundary is
smeared.
(8) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
13 There are many satellite
droplets (unnecessary dots)
(1) Check if the use
conditions are within
the normal
operation
conditions.
Be sure to use the
product under the
guaranteed
operation
conditions.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




303
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

14 Fiber tracking is shown in prints. (2) Check if printing
began immediately
after ink
replenishment.
The following
phenomena may
occur for the first
printing processed
immediately after
ink replenishment.
Faint lines are
drawn.
White streaks
appear on the
printing.
If these conditions
are observed,
perform cleaning a
couple of times
before printing, then
check the results.
If cleaning does
not improve the
results, leave the
products for at least
several hours, redo
the cleaning
operation, then
check the results
again.
Users Guide
15 Lines look blurred when printed. (3) Check if the
tension of the steel
belt is properly
adjusted.
Adjust the steel
belt tension.
Steel belt tension
adjustment
(4) Check the head
adjustments.
Adjust the head. Head precision
adjustment
(5) Check the T
fence for
contamination.
Clean the T fence
If contaminants
cannot be cleaned
up by cleaning,
replace the T fence.
Replacing the T
fence
(6) Make sure that
the CR_ENC
assembly and the T
fence are not
interfering.
If they interfere
with each other,
adjust the
installation positions
of the CR_ENC
assembly and the T
fence.
If the adjustments
do not improve this,
replace the
CR_ENC assembly
and the T fence.
Replacing the T
fence.
Replacing the
CR_ENC assembly
(7) Check if the
pump is running
during the cleaning
operation.
Check that
connections of
Mainboard
connectors J160-
J161 are good.
Replace the pump
motor assembly.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
Replacing the
pump motor
assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




304
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(8) Check if the
nozzle face is wiped
correctly.
Using the wiper,
wipe the nozzle face
well.
Users Guide
(9) Check the
cleaning wipers for
contamination.
Using the provided
cleaning cloth for
cleaning the wipers,
slightly dampen it
with cleaning liquid
and wipe the
surfaces of the
cleaning wipers,
then recheck their
conditions by
performing the
cleaning operation.
If the ink is solid
and does not come
off by wiping,
replace the wiper.
Users Guide.
Replacing the
cleaner
(10) Check if the QR
code is input
correctly.
Input the correct
QR codes.
Head rank input
menu
(11) The head
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
damaged head
assembly
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(12) The ink tube
may be damaged.
Replace the ink
tube.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(13) The CR board
may have a
problem.
Replace the CR
board assembly.
Replacing the CR
board assembly.
(14) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
16 Mixed colour lines do not
overlap.
(1) Check if the
tension of the steel
belt is properly
adjusted.
Adjust the steel
belt tension.
Steel belt tension
adjustment
17 The positions of black and
colours are not aligned.
(2) Check the head
inclination and
height adjustments.
Adjust the
inclination and
height of the head.
Head precision
adjustment
(3) Check the two-
way printing position
alignment for
problems.
Adjust the two-way
printing position
alignment.
Repeatability
alignment menu
(4) Check if CW
adjustments are
made correctly.
Perform the CW
adjustments.
CW adjustment
menu
(5) Check if the QR
code is input
correctly.
Input the correct
QR codes.
Head rank input
menu
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




305
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(6) Make sure that
the CR_ENC
assembly and the T
fence are not
interfering.
If they are
interfering with each
other, adjust the
installation positions
of the CR_ENC
assembly and the T
fence.
If the adjustments
do not improve this,
replace the
CR_ENC assembly
and the T fence.
Replacing the T
fence.
Replacing the
CR_ENC assembly.
(7) The head
assembly may be
damaged.
Replace the
damaged head
assembly.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
(1) Check if the use
conditions are within
the normal
operation
conditions.
be sure to use the
product under the
operation
conditions.
-
(2) Check if the
tension of the steel
belt is adjusted
correctly.
Adjust the steel
belt tension.
Steel belt tension
adjustment
(3) Check the T
fence for
contamination.
Clean the T fence
If the contaminants
cannot be cleaned
up, replace the T
fence.
Replacing the T
fence.
18 A limited line in the head travel
direction is not accurate (in the
main scanning direction)

A: Paper discharging direction
(4) The internal
process operation of
the Mainboard
assembly may be
malfunctioning.
Check the
operation again
after initializing
parameters and re-
inputting and re-
adjusting them.
Parameter
initialization menu.
(1) Make sure that
the PF reduction
belt tension is
adjusted correctly.
Adjust the tension
of the PF reduction
belt.
PF deceleration
belt tension
adjustment.
(2) Check the
rotation of the
pressure roller with
the pressure arm at
the raised position.
If the surrounding
area of the pressure
arm is contaminated
by paper, wipe it
with a soft
dampened cloth.
Users Guide
19 Straight lines in the head travel
direction are not accurate
(straightness)



A: Paper discharging direction
(3) Check if rattles
are heard when the
carriage is moved
from side to side.
Clean the dust from
the carriage
bearings and roller
guide. When the
roller guide is
cleaned, apply a
light coat of grease
on the roller guide
using a cloth soaked
in grease spray.
Replace the CR
cursor assembly
Replacing the CR
cursor assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




306
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Check if the use
conditions are within
the normal
operation
conditions.
Be sure to use the
product under the
operation
conditions.
-
(2) Check if distance
is compensated for
the paper in use.
Compensate the
distance.
Band feed
correction menu
(3) Check the PF
drive pulley for
looseness.
Replace the PF
motor assembly.
Replacing the PF
motor assembly.
(4) Make sure that
the PF reduction
belt tension is
adjusted correctly.
Adjust the tension
of the PF reduction
belt.
PF deceleration
belt tension
adjustment
(5) Check the
rotation of the
pressure roller with
the pressure arm at
the raised position.
If the surrounding
area of the pressure
roller is
contaminated by
paper dust and
waste paper, wipe it
with a soft
dampened cloth.
Users Guide
(6) Check the grid
roller for rugged
movement. Also,
check the rotary
movement for
irregularities.
If foreign material
such as paper dust
and wastepaper are
found on the grid
rollers, remove them
using a nylon brush.
Users Guide
20 A limited line in the paper feed
direction is not accurate ( in the
sub scanning direction)



A : Paper discharging direction
(7) If the paper in
concern is roll
paper, check if the
scroller is rotating
smoothly.
Make sure that the
scroller receiver is
installed correctly.
Replace the rollers
of the scroller.
Replacing the
scroller R assembly.
Replacing the
scroller L assembly.
(1) Check if the
actually installed
head rank and the
registered head
rank match.
Input the correct
head rank.
Head rank input
menu.
(2) Adjust the
inclination of the
head.
Adjust the
inclination of the
head.
Head precision
adjustment.
(3) Check if the
tension of the steel
belt is adjusted
correctly.
Adjust the steel
belt tension.
Steel belt tension
adjustment.
(4) Check the two-
way printing position
alignment for
problems.
Adjust the two-way
printing position
alignment.
Repeatability
alignment menu
(5) Check if the CW
adjustments are
made correctly.
Perform the CW
adjustments.
CW adjustments
menu
(6) Check the T
fence for
contamination.
Clean the T fence
If contaminants
cannot be cleaned
up, replace the T
fence.
Replacing the T
fence
21 Straightness in the paper feed
direction is not accurate (paper
joint accuracy).



A : Paper discharging direction
(7) Check the CR
cursor assembly for
play.
Replace the CR
cursor assembly.
Replacing the CR
cursor assembly.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




307
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(1) Check the
installation method
of the paper.
Setup the paper
according to the
Users Guide.
Users Guide
(2) Check the
rotation of the
pressure roller with
the pressure arm at
the raised position.
If the surrounding
area of the pressure
roller is
contaminated by
paper dust and
waste paper, wipe it
with a soft
dampened cloth.
Users Guide
22 Inaccurate squareness

(3) Check the grid
roller for rugged
movement. Also,
check the rotary
movement for
irregularities.
If the surrounding
area of the pressure
roller is
contaminated by
paper dust and
waste paper, wipe it
with a soft
dampened cloth.
Users Guide
(1) Check if the two
head tape power
cables stick
together.
The cores of the
head tape power
cables should be
aligned for each
head and taped
together with
double-sided tape.
Replacing the
print head assembly
and head tape
power cable.
23 Abnormal discharge occurs.
(2) Make sure that
the CR tape power
cables are bundled
correctly.
Bundle the CR
tape power cables
so that they do not
move.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




308
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.3.4. Problems relating to noise

No. Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) Check the
surroundings of the
suction fan
assembly for
obstructions and
foreign objects.
Remove
obstructions and
foreign material.
Replacing the
suction fan
assembly.
(2) Check the
cables for damage
and make sure that
the connector
connections are
good.
If damage is
found, replace the
appropriate parts.
-
(3) The suction fan
assembly may have
failed.
Replace the
suction fan
assembly.
Replacing the
suction fan
assembly.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may have
failed.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
1 There is noise when the paper is
loaded.
(5) The power
supply board
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the power
supply board
assembly.
Replacing the
power source board
assembly.
2 You hear some noise during
printing wait.
(1) Check the area
where there is noise
from for obstruction
and foreign
materials.
Remove the
obstructions and
foreign materials.
-
(1) Check if the high
pitch sound emitted
while ink is
discharging during
printing, is not
confused with the
noise.
Follow the
descriptions in the
specifications.
- 3 You hear some noise when the
head is moving from side to
side.
(2) Check the
screws on the cover
for looseness that
causes noise.
Re-tighten the
screws.
Removing the
cover.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




309
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

(3) Check if rattles
are heard when the
carriage is moving
from side to side.
Clean the dust
from the carriage
bearings and roller
guide. When the
roller guide has
been cleaned, apply
a light coat of
grease on the roller
guide using a cloth
soaked in grease
spray.
Replace the CR
cursor assembly.
Replacing the CR
cursor assembly
(4) Check the CR
cables for noise.
Correct the cables
tendency and fix the
condition.
If noise is heard
from between the
steel bearing and
tube guide, replace
the tube guide.
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(5) Make sure that
the CR_ENC
assembly and the T
fence are not
interfering.
If interference is
observed, adjust the
installation positions
of the appropriate
components.
If the adjustment
does not improve
this, replace the
appropriate
components.
Replacing the T
fence
Replacing the
CR_ENC assembly
(6) Check the
bearings of the CR
driven pulley for
noise.
Replace the CR
driven pulley
assembly.
Replacing the CR
slave pulley
assembly.
(7) Check if the
tension of the steel
belt has been
properly adjusted.
Adjust the steel
belt tension.
Steel belt tension
adjustment.
(8) Check the CR
motor assembly for
noise.
Replace the CR
motor assembly.
Replacing the CR
motor assembly.
(9) Check the cursor
roller of the CR
cursor assembly for
noise.
Replace the cursor
roller.
Replacing the
cursor roller
assembly.
(1) Check the PF
reduction belt for the
skipping of teeth
between the belt
and PF reduction
pulley.
Replace the PF
reduction belt.
Replacing the PF
motor assembly
(2) Check the PF
motor assembly for
noise
Replace the PF
motor assembly.
Replacing the PF
motor assembly
4 You hear some noise when the
paper is fed.
(3) Check the grid
roller for rugged
movement. Also,
check the rotary
movement for
irregularities.
If foreign materials
such as paper dust
and waste paper are
found on the grid
rollers, remove it
using a nylon brush.
Users Guide.
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




310
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.3.5. Problems relating to the paper cutting operation

No. Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) Check the operation panel
and make sure that the media
cutting setting is not set to off
or manual.
Change the
setting.
Users Guide
(2) Check the operation panel
and make sure that PaperDet.
has not been set to
TakeUpRoll.
Change the
setting.
Users Guide
(3) Check the cutter grooves
for accumulated paper dust
and clips.
Remove the
accumulated paper
dust along the
direction of the
grooves.
Users Guide
(4) Is the cutter cap securely
installed?
Reset the cutter
cap securely.
Users Guide
(5) Check the cutters up and
down sliding operation.
If it does not rise :
go to step 4
if it rises : go to
step 5
-
(6) Check if the cutter drops to
the bottom end under its own
weight when the cutter is
installed without the cutter
spring.
If it drops :
The cutter spring
may have a
problem. Replace
the cutter spring
while referring to the
unfolded view.
If it does not drop :
The cutter may have
a problem. Replace
the cutter. If the
cutter does not drop
after it is replaced,
replace the cutter
holder.
Replacing the
cutter holder, cutter
spring, cutter cap,
solenoid assembly
and solenoid spring.
(7) Check the up and down
operation
of the solenoid via Life/Cutter
of the
self-diagnostic function.

1 The cutting operation
is not performing
correctly.
a) The solenoid moves up and
down:
check the cutters down
position
relative to the cutter groove.
OK :
The cutters service
life has exceeded or
the cutter is
damaged. Replace
the cutter.
NG :
Adjust the position
of the cutter holder.
Users Guide
Cutter adjustment
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




311
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

b) It does not move up or
down.
The connectors
may have poor
contacts.
Check the
connections of the
following
connectors.
CR board : J235
CR board : J201-
J216
Mainboard : J137-
J152
Replacing the CR
board assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
(8) Open CR cable, faulty
solenoid assembly, faulty
board assembly, etc. may be
the causes.
Replace the CR
tape power cables.
Replace the
solenoid assembly
Replace the CR
board assembly
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
steel bearer, tube
guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
Replacing the
cutter holder, cutter
spring, cutter cap,
solenoid assembly
and solenoid spring.
Replacing the CR
board assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
(1) Check if the paper (output)
size on the application side is
correct.
Correct the paper
(output) size on the
application side.
-
(2) The program ROM may
have failed.
Upgrade the
firmware version.
Firmware
installation
(3) Check the CR cables for
skewed insertion.
Check the
connections of the
following
connectors.
CR board : J235
CR board : J201-
J216
Mainboard : J137
J152
Replacing the CR
board assembly
(4) The CR board may have a
problem.
Replace the CR
board.
Replacing the CR
board assembly
2 Cutting has been
performed during
printing.
(5) The Mainboard may have a
problem.
Replace the
Mainboard .
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




312
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

3 The cutting operation
is in process, but the
paper has not been
cut.
(1) Check the cutter blade for
shipping and deterioration.
Replace the cutter. Users Guide
4 The paper has not
been cut as smoothly
as expected,
resulting in jamming.
(2) Check if the cutter cap is
securely installed.
Reset the cutter
cap securely.
Users Guide
(3) Check if the cutter moves
up and down smoothly.
Reinstall the cutter
spring.
-
(4) Check the cutter grooves
for accumulated paper dust
and slips.
Remove the
accumulated paper
dust along the
direction of the
grooves.
Users Guide
(5) Check if the cutter blade is
parallel with the groove.
Make adjustments. Replacing the
cutter holder, cutter
spring, cutter cap,
solenoid assembly
and solenoid spring.
(1) The sub-platen (cutter
groove) requires daily
maintenance.
Clean the surface
of the sub-platen
5 The cutting operation
is in process but the
paper does not fall
off. (2) The sub-platen, paper
guide or the paper may be
charged with static electricity.
Provide a proper
ground.
Check and adjust
the ambient
humidity so that it
meets the normal
operation conditions
of the product and
paper.
-
(1) Check the cutter blade for
chipping and deterioration.
Replace the cutter. Users Guide
(2) Has the cutter cap been
securely installed?
Reset the cutter
cap securely.
Users Guide
(3) Check if the cutter moves
up and down smoothly.
Reinstall the cutter
spring.
-
(4) Check the cutter grooves
for accumulated paper dust
and slips.
Remove the
accumulated paper
dust along the
direction of the
grooves.
Users Guide
(5) Check if the cutter blade is
parallel with the groove.
Make adjustments. Replacing the
cutter holder, cutter
spring, cutter cap,
solenoid assembly
and solenoid spring.
6 Inaccurate paper
cutting
(6) The cutter may have a
problem.
Replace the cutter. Users Guide
(1) Check the operation panel
and make sure the InkDryTime
has not been set.
Change the
settings.
Users Guide 7 Cutting starts after
the completion of the
print.
(2) Check the LCD and see if
messages for an analysis have
been displayed.
Printing data
remains.
Users Guide
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




313
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.3.6. Problems relating to online and functions

No. Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) Check the
Centronics settings in
the operation panel.
Change the setting. Users Guide
(2) Replace the
interface cables and
see if errors still occur.
Trouble such as an open
interface cable or cables
that are too long may
cause communication
failure. An instruction must
be given so that only
cables compliant with the
standard are used.
-
(3) The program ROM
may have failed.
Upgrade the firmware
version.
Firmware
installation
1 Online has not been
properly established
by Centronics.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may have a
problem.
Replace the Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and cooling
fan assembly
(1) Check if the cables
in use for connections
are correct.
Use 100BASE-T cross
cables for direct
connections to the host.
Use 100BASE-T straight
cables for connections
using HUBs.
- 2 Online has not been
properly established
by the network.
(2) Check the network
settings in the
operation panel for
problems.
Reset the settings upon
confirmation by an network
administrator.
Users Guide
3 Scaling is not
functioning correctly.
(1) The program ROM
may have failed.
Upgrade the firmware
version
Firmware
installation
4 Mirroring is not
functioning correctly.
5 Other functions are
not performing
correctly.
(2) The Mainboard
assembly may have a
problem.
Replace the Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and cooling
fan assembly
(1) Check if CW
adjustments are made
correctly.
Make adjustments. CW adjustment
menu
(2) Check the top &
bottom adjustments
Make adjustments. Top & Bottom
adjustment menu
(3) The program ROM
may have failed.
Upgrade the firmware
version
Firmware
installation
6 The printing position
has been misaligned.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may have a
problem.
Replace the Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_ DRV board
assembly and cooling
fan assembly
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




314
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


7 A portion of the data
has not been drawn
(is missing).
(1) The program ROM
may have failed.
Upgrade the firmware
version.
Firmware
installation
8 Garbled characters or
printings are
produced.
(2) Check the T fence
for contamination and
bends.
If contaminated with
grease and dusts, wipe
with a dry cloth.
If contaminated with ink,
wipe with a lightly
dampened cloth and then
with a dry cloth.
If contamination is severe,
replace the T fence.
Replacing the T
fence
(3) Check the
Encoder:PF via
Test: Encoder of the
self-diagnostic function
Make sure that the
connections of Mainboard
assembly connector J132
are good.
Replace the T fence.
Replace the CR_ENC
assembly.
Replace the CR motor.
Replace the CR_BASE
board assembly.
Replace the CR tape
power cables.
Replacing the
Mainboard assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and cooling
fan assembly
Replacing the T
fence.
Replacing the CR
motor assembly
Replacing the CR
board assembly.
Replacing (storing)
the steel bearing,
tube guide, CR tape
power cable and ink
tube.
(4) The Mainboard
assembly may have a
problem.
Replace the Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and cooling
fan assembly
(1) The program ROM
may have failed.
Upgrade he firmware
version.
Firmware
installation
9 After printing has
been completed, the
paper is fed an extra
amount.
(2) The Mainboard
assembly may have a
problem.
Replace the Mainboard
assembly
Replacing the
Mainboard assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and cooling
fan assembly
Spitfire Maintenance Manual




315
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

9.3.7. Other problems

No. Phenomenon Check point Action Refer to
(1) The internal
process operation of
the Mainboard
assembly may be
malfunctioning.
Check the
operation again
after initializing
parameters and re-
inputting and re-
adjusting them.
Parameter
backup
1 A hang up occurs
(2) The Mainboard
assembly may have
a problem.
Replace the
Mainboard
assembly.
Replacing the
Mainboard
assembly,
HDD_Extension
board assembly,
HEAD_DRV board
assembly and
cooling fan
assembly
(1) Make sure that
the power cables
are not
disconnected.
Securely connect
the power cables.
-
(2) Check the power
cables for a shorted
condition.
Check the
condition using a
tester.
-
2 The power has been cut off
during the printing operation.
(3) Check for
leakage.
Check the cables
for peeled off
insulation and
contact with the
case.
-




Spitfire Maintenance Manual




316
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




317
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

10. APPENDIX
10.1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides referential information such as service data and exploded views.



10.2 WIRING DIAGRAM



10.4. SERVICE PARTS LIST/EXPLODED
VIEWS/CONFIGURATION DIAGRAMS
This section includes the service parts list, exploded views of respective units and configuration diagrams.


Notes :

For the latest exploded views and part description, please refer to the spare part
lists of the printer.
The latest exploded views are available separately from the manual.
For spare parts, please refer to the latest spare part list.
Specifications are liable to changes without prior notice.

Spitfire Maintenance Manual




318
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05


Spitfire Maintenance Manual




319
AP-74096, Rev. 1.0, 09/06/05

You might also like